Tải bản đầy đủ (.doc) (148 trang)

anh 6 ngon

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (717.48 KB, 148 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>

Teaching date: .10.08
Unit 5: Things I do


<b> Lesson 1/25 : A1-2</b>


<b>A. Aim : By the end of the lesson , ss will be able to use the simple present tense with </b>
I,she ,he to talk about daily routines.


<b>B. Teaching aids : </b>


-text book,poster,cards, pictures
<b>C. Teaching methods:</b>


practice speaking , reading about what they do every morning.
<b>D. Proceduces:</b>


Teacher’s activities ss’s activities
<b>I.Presentation:</b>


1. warmer:


- có bao nhiêu cách nói giờ, hÃy viết
cấu trúc?


-T asks the ss the time:
what time do you get up?


have breakfast?
go to school?
-gives feedback.



2. vocabulary:


-(to) do your homework: lµm bµi tËp vỊ
nhµ


- Every day : mỗi ngày


- (to) play games : chơi trò chơi


<b>+ Checking vocabulary:</b>


<b> doyourhomework </b>
go to school



have breakfast


get dressed
play games


<b>3.</b>


Presentation text.


- Set the scene: Nga is talking about her
daily routines.


- Let students to listen to the cassette
and answer:



What does Nga do every day?
- Show them the difference of the
verbs when the subject is the 3rd
person singular.


<i><b>He / She + động từ thêm s / es</b></i>“ ”
<b> - thông thờng thêm“s” (gets up,</b>…)
-tận cùng: s, x, o, sh, ch thêm “es”
(gets up, goes, plays, does,…)


4. Practice:
Substitution drill


- Get students to repeat the sentence
with the target item in it.


- Call out one word to be changed in the


-1 student writes on the board
-ss answer the questions


- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebook
<b> Group works.</b>



- Say the English words .
- Listen to the teacher.


- Run forward and slap the correct words on
the board.


- Continue until students have slapped all
the words .


Listen to the teacher’s explanation.
- listen to the cassette and answer:
She gets up, goes to school……
-copy the use


- Repeat the sentence with the target item in
it.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

sentence:


<i> +Every day I get up at 6. </i>
<i> + Nga. </i>


- Do the same for the seccond picture.
- Correct their mistakes.


5.Further practice:
suvey:


- Have students look at the table on the
board.



<i><b>Nam</b></i>


<i><b>e</b></i> <i><b>get up</b></i>


<i><b>have</b></i>
<i><b>break</b></i>


<i><b>f- ast</b></i>


<i><b>play</b></i>
<i><b>game</b></i>


<i><b>s</b></i>


<i><b>do your</b></i>
<i><b></b></i>


<i><b>home-work</b></i>


<i>Mai</i> <i>6.00</i> <i>6.15</i> <i>4.30</i> <i>7.00</i>


<i>……</i>


<i>…</i> <i>………</i> <i>………</i> <i>………</i> <i>………</i>


- Ask students to ask and answer
questions about their daily routines .


-Correct if there are any mistakes


6.Homework:


-Ask students to learn by heart
vocabulary of routines and simple
present tense with I, he and she.


- Have them prepare Unit 5 –
Lesson 2:(A3 –<i> A4)</i>: “Wh”


questions with he, she to talk about
daily routines.


+Every day I get up at 6.
<i> +Every day Nga gets up at 6.</i>
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice


- Look at the board and listen to the teacher.


- Ask and answer questions about their daily
routines.


- Some students retell their partners’ daily
routines.


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher requests.


*T’s evaluation:



...


...
...




Teaching date: .10.08
Unit 5: Things I do


<b> Lesson 1/26 : A3 - 4</b>


<b>A. Aim : By the end of the lesson , ss will be able to use the simple present tense </b>
“wh-question “ with she ,he to talk about daily routines.


<b>B. Teaching aids : </b>


-text book,poster,cards, pictures
<b>C. Teaching methods:</b>


practice speaking , reading about daily routines
<b>D. Proceduces:</b>


Teacher’s activities ss’s activities
<b>I.Presentation:</b>


1.Warmer:


- Ask students to ask and answer


questions about their daily routines .
- Ask some students to retell their
partners’ daily routines


<b>2 .Vocabulary:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

- (to) listen to music : nghe nhaïc.
- (to) do the housework: làm việc
nhà.


- (to) read : đọc.


- (to) watch TV : xem TV.


<b>+ Checking vocabulary</b>


<b>Ordering vocabulary</b>


-Read a short passage about Lan’s
daily routines and ask the ss to put the
words in correct order.


<i> Every morning, Lan gets up and <b>listens</b></i>
<i><b>to music</b>. In the afternoon, she comes </i>
<i>home and <b>does the housework</b>. Then </i>
<i>she <b>watches TV</b>. In the evening, she </i>
<i>does her homework and<b> reads</b> books</i>
<b>3.Presentation text.</b>


- Set the scene: Ba, Lan, Nam and Thu


are talking about what they do after
school.


- Let students to read the text.


- Ask students to answer the questions
( a – b )


- Let students isolate the model
sentences by asking and answering
the questions


<i>+ What does Lan do after school?</i>


<i>+ What does Ba do after school?</i>
<i> + What does Thu do after school?</i>
<i> + What does Nam do after school?</i>


<i><b>+ Form:</b></i>


<i><b> What + does + Tên/he/she+ do …?</b></i>
<i><b> Tên/he/she + động từ thêm “s / es” </b></i>


- Hỏi người khác (ngôi thứ 3 số ít) làm
gì ( sau giờ học )


<b>3. Practice: picture cues</b>


- Ba / watch television.
- Lan / do the housework.



- Nam / listen to music.
- Thu / read.


- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.
- Notice the main stress pattern.


-Write the new words in their notebooks.


- Listen to the teacher.


- re order: listen,does the ..,wacth, read
- Copy the words in their books.


- Listen to the teacher’s explanation.


- Read the text about What Ba, Lan, Nam
and Thu do after school.


- Answer the questions (a–b)


- Isolate the model sentences by asking and
answering the questions


-copy the form


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

- Run through the cues.


- Hold up the first cues and say the


model sentences.


<i>- What does Ba do after school ? -</i> <i>He</i>
<i>watches television.</i>


- Do the same for the second cue.
- Correct their mistakes.


<b>4.Further practice:</b>
He / play


games


She / brush
her teeth


Lan / do the
housework
Ba / get


dressed


Nam / go
to school


She / do her
homework
She / wash


her face He / havebreakfast Mai / listen tomusic



- Congratulate the winne


<b>5.Homework:</b>


<b> </b>- Vocabulary of routines.


<i>- </i> <i>What + does + Teân/he/she+ do …? </i>


<i>Tên/he/she + động từ thêm “s / es”.</i>


- Unit 5: Thing I do – Lesson 3 :


<i>A5 - A6</i>.


- Listen to the teacher.


-Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.
- Look at the board.


- Work in groups.


- One is noughts (O) and the other is
Crosses (X).


- Choose any phrases in the boxes, ask and


ask questions about what they do … ( Use
every morning / afternoon / evening in
their questions ).


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher requests.


*T’s evaluation:


...
...


...
...
...


Teaching date: .10 .08
Unit 4: big or small?


<b> Lesson 5/24 : C4-7</b>


<b>A. Aim : By the end of the lesson , ss will be able to use the simple present tense </b>
“wh-question “ with she ,he to talk about daily routines.


<b>B. Teaching aids : </b>


-text book,poster,cards, pictures
<b>C. Teaching methods:</b>


practice speaking , reading about daily routines


<b>D. Proceduces:</b>


Teacher’s activities ss’s activities
<b>I.Presentation:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

- Put the numbers on the board


30 15 40 12
8 25 7 50


11 45 20 10


-Ask students to choose any five
numbers and copy them into their books.
- Read out the things in any order.


2 .Vocabulary:


- The time : thêi gian.
- [ten ] o’clock : [10 ]giê
- Half past [ten ] : [10 ] giê 30.
- ( to ) be late for : trÔ , muén
- ( to ) go home : vỊ nhµ.
<b>+ Checking vocabulary:</b>


- Elicit the vocabulary from the
students


<b> half past ten </b>
half past ten




be late for


go home
the time


- Get students to repeat the words
including the rubbed out words by
pointing at the empty circle.


3.Presentation pictures.
- Set the scene:


Ba and his friend are going to school.
- Introduce new structures, using
pictures.


- Point to the picture.


+ What does she ask him?
+ What does he answer?


<b>+ Target language: C4(page 50)</b>
- What time is it , Ba?


<i> - It s eight o clock !</i>’ ’


<i> We re be late for school.</i>‘
<i><b>What time is it / the time?</b></i>


<i><b> It is + sốgiờ + o clock. </b></i>’
<i><b> It is + số phút+ past + số giờ- </b></i>
Dùng để hỏi giờ


3. Practice :
Picture cue drill:
- 6.00
- 2.10


- 5.15 - 7.30
- 10.00 - 8.05 - 7.35
- Run through the pictures.


- Hold up the first picture and say the
model sentences:


<i> +What time is it? </i>
<i> + It s six o clock. </i>’ ’


-Look at the board.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Choose any five numbers.


- Put ticks next to the numbers that the
teacher reads.


- Shouts “Bingo”.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Answer the T’s questions.


- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.
- Students repeat chorally and remember all
the words.


- Go to the board and fill in the circles with
the right words.


- Look at the pictures and listen to the
teacher’s explanation.


-Repeat after the teacher.


- Isolate the model sentence by
answer the teacher’s questions


-copy the target language
- Look at the pictures.
- Listen to the teacher.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

4.Further practice:
Noughts and crooses:
<b>6.30 6.45 6.20. </b>
<b> </b>


<b>7.10 9.00 4.55 </b>
<b>12.35 3.40. 1.30</b>


5.Homework:


<b> - Numbers.</b>


- What time is it?


<i> It s ’ ……… .</i>


- Exercises in the workbook from page
40 to 42.


- Unit 5: Thing I do – Lesson 6 :
<i>A1 - A2.</i>


- Make the sentence by themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.
- Look at the board.


- Work in groups.


- One is noughts (O) and the other is
Crosses (X).


- Choose any things in the boxes, ask and
ask questions about what things are.


- Congratulations to the winner.
-Take notes and memorize


- Do homework as requested.
*T’s evaluation:


...
...


...
...
...


Teaching date: .11 .08
Unit 5: Things I do


<b> Lesson 1/27 : A5 - 6</b>


<b>A. Aim : By the end of the lesson , ss will be able to use “yes/no-question “and its </b>
short answers to talk about daily routines.


.Do +you /they+ play...? yes, they do./ No, they don’t
.Does she/he+play ...? yes, s/he does ./ No , s/he doesn’t
<b>B. Teaching aids : </b>


-text book
- poster,


- pictures of daily routines
<b>C. Teaching methods:</b>


-practice speaking , reading about daily routines


<b>D. Proceduces:</b>


Teacher’s activities ss’s activities
I.Presentation:


1. Warmer: complete the phrases
... school


... music


...television
... the housework
...books


...homework
- let the ss read the words


- Go to the board and write


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

- have the ss play game.
2 .Vocabulary:


-(to)play volleyball: chơi bóng chuyền
football/soccer : đábóng
sports: chơi thể thao


-read the words.


<b>+ Checking vocabulary:</b>
Rub out and remember



-Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub
out English words.


- Get students to call the English words.
3.Dialogue build.


- Set the scene.


- Read the dialogue and write few key words
on the board to help students remember what
the two speaker in the dialogue say to each
other .


<i><b>Ba: </b></i> What do Thu and Vui do after school?


<i><b>Lan:</b>They play soccer.</i>


<i><b>Ba: </b>Do girls play soccer? <b>L:</b></i> Yes, they do.


<i><b>Ba:</b></i> Do you play soccer? <i><b>L:</b></i> No, I don t’ .


<i><b>Ba:</b></i> Does Nga play soccer?


<i><b>Lan:</b></i> No, she doesn’t.


- ask the ss to give the target language:


Do you / they + V(chi hoat dong)?
+ Yes, I / they do - No, I / they don’t.


- Does he / she +V (hoat dong))?


+Yes, he/she does - No, he/she doesn’t.
4. Practice : A6 ( page 55)


<b> a) Do you play sports?</b>
b) Do you watch television?
c) Do you do the housework?
d) Do you play volleyball?
e) Do you listen to music?
f) Do you read?


g) Do you do your homework
5.Further practice:


Find someone who....


- Get students to get into groups.


<i><b>Action</b></i> <i><b>Name</b></i>


<i>watches TV</i>


<i>………</i> <i>Lan</i>


<i>plays football</i>
<i>………</i>


<i>. doesthehousework</i>
<i>plays</i>



<i>………</i>
<i>volleyball</i>


<i>listen to music</i>
<i>………</i>


<i>reads</i>
<i>………</i>


- Get students to ask each other questions.
+ Teacher: Do you watch TV?


+ Student (Lan): Yes, I do.


- Correct if there are any mistakes.


- Play ” slap the board”
- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.
- Students repeat chorally and remember all
the English words.


- Call the English words and write the English
words if there is time



-Answer the teacher’s question.


- Look at the board and listen to the teacher
carefully.


- Reproduce the dialogue from the cues.
- Build the dialogue until it is memorized.
- Write in the missing words on the board -


- ss copy the target language


- Listen to the tape.
- Teacher – student.


- Answer the teacher’s question. The answer
is a real answer.


+ Yes, I do./ no, I don t<i>’</i>


-Work in groups.


- Stand up and ask each orther questions.
When they find someone who says “Yes” they
fill in the name. They can’t fill in someone’s
name more than once.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

- Feedback.
6.Homework:


<b> </b>- learn by heart the vocabulary.


<i>- Do you / they + động từ..?-Yes/No.</i>


- <i>Does he / she +</i> <i> động từ..?-Yes/No.</i>


- Exercises in the workbook from page 43
to 46.


- Unit 5: Thing I do – <i>MY ROUTINE</i> -
Lesson 4 : <i>B1 - B3</i>.


- Take notes and memorize


- Do homework as requested.es TV “


<b>*</b>

T’s evaluation:


...
...
...
...
...


<b> </b>

Teaching date: .11.08


<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 5: THINGs I DO</b>


<b> Lesson 4/28 : MY ROUTINE (BI </b>–<b> B3)</b>


<b>A. Aim:</b>



By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand about Ba’s daily routine
to practice Simple present tense.


<b> B. Teaching aids:</b>


books, poster, pictures about routines
<b>C.Methods: </b>


- Reading a picture story about Ba’s daily routine
- practice speaking using the Simple present tense
<b> D. Procedures: </b>


<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>ss’activities</b>


<b>1. Revision: </b>


<b> Jumbled words</b>


-Write numbers whose letters are in
disorder.


- tislen = listen
- arde = read
- tchaw = watch
- pyla = father
- Divide the class into two teams.


- Ask students from each team to go to the
board and write the correct words .



<b>2 .Pre - reading: </b>
<b> +Vocabulary:</b>


- (to) take a shower : tắm vòi sen.


-Look at the board.


- Listen to the teacher.
- Work in teams.


- Go to the board and write the correct
words. (One word, one student).
- Listen to the teacher.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

- (to) eat : ăn, dùng.
- (to) start : bắt đầu.
- (to) finish : kết thúc.
- (to) have lunch : ăn sáng.
- (to) go to bed : đi ngủ.


<b>+ Checking vocabulary:</b>
<b> </b>have lunch<b> </b>


go to bed



take a shower


finish
eat



<b>*Predict Grid</b>


- Set the scene: Ba is talking about his daily
activities .


- Have students copy the table.


- Get students to guess about Ba’s daily
activities by writing the time in figures.
B2 (page 57)


<b>Action</b> <b><sub>Ba</sub></b> <b>Time</b> <b><sub>Me</sub></b>


get up
go to school
class start
class finish
have lunch
go home
go to bed


<b>3. While reading:</b>


- Ask students to read the text and check
their prediction.


- get up: <i>6.00</i> - have lunch: <i>11.30</i>


- go to school: <i>6.45</i> - go home: <i>5.00</i>



- classes start: <i>7.00</i> - go to bed: <i>10.00</i>


- classes finish: <i>11.15</i>
<b>*Reading comprehension</b>
<i>- What time does Ba get up?</i>
<i>- He gets up at 6.00</i>


<i>- What time does he go to school?</i>
<i>- He go to school at 6.45</i>


<i>- What time does he have classes?</i>


- Notice the main stress pattern.
- Write the new words in their
notebooks.


- Students repeat chorally and remember
all the words.


- Go to the board and fill in the circles
with the right words.


- Listen to the teacher.


- Pay attention to the teacher’s
planation.


- Students copy the table.



- Guess about Ba’s daily activities by
writing the time in figures.


- Read the text and check their
prediction.


- Reread the text by themselves.


- Listen to the teacher and repeat after
the teacher.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

<i>- He has classes at 7.00</i>


<i>- What time does he have lunch?</i>
<i>- He has lunch at 11.30 </i>


<i>- What time does he go home?</i>
<b>4.Further practice:</b>


<b>Survey</b>


- Ask students to use the table on page 57
again.


<i><b>Action</b></i> <i><b>Me</b></i>


<i>get up</i> <i>5.30</i>


<i>go to school</i>
<i>class start</i>


<i>class finish</i>
<i>have lunch</i>
<i>go home</i>
<i>go to bed</i>


- Get students to get into pairs.


- Get students to ask each other questions.
<i>+ What time do you get up? </i>


+ <i>I get up at………….</i>


- Correct if there are any mistakes.
- Feedback.


<b>5.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart
vocabulary.


- Have them do exercises in the workbook
from page 46 to 49 and prepare Unit 5
-Lesson 5:(<i>C1)</i>: Talking about school
timetable.


<b> </b>


question.


<i>+ What time does Ba get up?</i>



<i>+ What time does Ba go to school?</i>


- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.


- use the table on page 57 again.


- Work in pairs.


- Ask each other questions and fill in the
time.


<i>+ What time do you go to school? </i>


+ <i>I go to school at………….</i>


- Tell the teacher what they have
asked their partner, e.g. <i>“ Nam </i>
<i>gets up at 5.30. He………</i>


- Take notes and memorize
- Do homewor as requested
<b>* T’s evaluation :</b>


...
...
...
...



Teaching date: 6.
11 .08


<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 5: THING I DO</b>


<b> </b>

<i> </i><b>Lesson 5/29: CLASSES (C1)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

A. Aim:


By the end of the lesson, students will be school subject vocabulary with “ Have / Don’t
have ” to talk about school timetable.


B. Teaching aids:


Poster, picture 20, textbook
<b>C. Methods: </b>


Practice reading and speaking
<b>D. Procedures:</b>


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> SS activities</b>’
<b>1. warmer:</b>


<b>Word Square</b>


- Write the word of the square on the board.


<b>H</b> <b>O</b> <b>M</b> <b>E</b> <b>W</b> <b>O</b> <b>R</b> <b>K</b>



<b>S</b> <b>L</b> <b>I</b> <b>S</b> <b>T</b> <b>E</b> <b>N</b> <b>T</b>


<b>T</b> <b>D</b> <b>O</b> <b>P</b> <b>L</b> <b>A</b> <b>Y</b> <b>A</b>


<b>A</b> <b>G</b> <b>W</b> <b>O</b> <b>R</b> <b>K</b> <b>O</b> <b>K</b>


<b>R</b> <b>O</b> <b>N</b> <b>R</b> <b>E</b> <b>A</b> <b>D</b> <b>E</b>


<b>T</b> <b>W</b> <b>A</b> <b>T</b> <b>C</b> <b>H</b> <b>T</b> <b>E</b>


<b>T</b> <b>M</b> <b>U</b> <b>S</b> <b>I</b> <b>C</b> <b>V</b> <b>A</b>


<b>O</b> <b>F</b> <b>I</b> <b>N</b> <b>I</b> <b>S</b> <b>H</b> <b>T</b>


- Tell the students what the topic is and how
many hidden words are there.


- Get the students to come to the board and
circle any words they can see.


<b>2 .Vocabulary:</b>


- a timetable : thêi kho¸ biĨu.
- English : tiÕngAnh.


- Math : toán.
- Literature : văn.
- history :lịch sử
- geography : địa lí
- Monday : thứ hai


<b>+ Checking vocabulary:</b>


Ordering vocabulary


<b> First We have literature. Then We have </b>
<i><b>geography. At eight forty We have English </b></i>
<i>and then We have Math .At ten fifteen We </i>
<i>have history. This is our timetable on </i>
<i><b>Monday. </b></i>


- Get students to copy the words in their
books.


- Read a short passage about a timetable on
Monday.


<b>3. Target language:</b>
<b> Presentation text.</b>


- Set the scene: They are talking about their
timetable.


- Ask students to listen to the text about the
timetable.


<b> - C1 (page 58)</b>


<i><b> + I </b> don t have</i>’ <i> my timetable .</i>
+ What do we have today?



<i> + It s Monday today. ’</i> <i>We have English .</i>
<i><b> S + have +N (m«n häc)</b></i>


<i><b> S + do not have +N (m«n häc) </b></i>
<i>- S ( I, We )</i>


<i>- Have ( ve ) : cã</i>‘


<i>- Do not ( don t ) have : kh«ng cã’</i>


-Look at the word of the square on the
board.


- Listen to the teacher and answer the
teacher questions.


+ There are 19 hidden workds


-Come to the board and circle any words
they can see.


<i> start, to, old, go, sports, TV, take, eat. </i>
- <i> homework,listen, </i>


<i>do,play,read,watch</i>
- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the main stress pattern.



- Write the new words in their notebooks.


- Look at the board.


- Copy the words in their books.


- Listen to the teacher and put the words in
the correct order by numbering them


- Listen to the teacher’s explanation.
- Listen to the text about the timetable.
- Answer the questions (a–b)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

<b>4. Practice: Word cue drill</b>
- Math / 7.50


- Geography / 10.15
- English / 7.00
- Literature /8.30
- History / 9.35


- Hold up the first cues and say the model
sentences.


<i>+ What do we have today ? </i>
<i> + We have math .</i>


+ What time does it start?
<i>+ It starts at (Seven fifty).</i>
- Correct their mistakes.


<b>5.Further practice:</b>


<b>Mapped dialogue</b>


- Put the dialogue on the board which is
only words. The words are cues.


<i><b> Lan </b></i>

<i><b> Nam  </b></i>
What / today ?


What / start ?
Do/liter../8.40?
What / finish ?
What / at
9.35?


Do we / math?


History.
7.50


No / English.
9.25


Geography.
Yes / 10.15.
- Model the dialogue.


- Run through the cues like a drill with the
whole class.



<b>6.Home work:</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary
and “ have/don’t have” to talk about the
timetable


- Have them prepare Unit 5 - Lesson 6:
(C2-C3): “Has/doesn’t have” to talk about
the weekly timetable


- copy them.


- Look at the cues.


- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.


- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.


- Look at the board and listen to the
teacher.


- Repeat after the teacher.
- Practice the dialogue in pair .
- Some pairs practice in front.



- Rewrite the dialogue .


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests.
<b>* Teacher’s evaluation:</b>


...
...
...
...
...


Teaching date:7.11.08
<b>UNIT 5: THINGS I DO</b>


<b> </b>

<b>Lesson 6/30: CLASSES (C2 </b>–<b> C3)</b>
<b>A.Aim:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

<b>B.Teaching aids:</b>


- Books, picture 20, time table
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking and writing
<b> D. Procedures:</b>


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> SS activities</b>’


<b>1.Revision: slap the board</b>


<b> timetable </b>


history


Monday
geography




math literature
- Call two students from 2 teams to the
front of the class.


- Call out one of the Vietnamese translation
in loud voice.


<b>2. vocabulary:</b>


- Use the situation to introduce the days of
the week.


Tuesday : thø 3
- Wenesday : thø 4
- Thursday : thø 5
- Friday : thø 6
- Saturday : thø 7
- Sunday : chñ nhËt


<b>* checking vocab.what and where </b>



<b>3. Presentation: + Target language:</b>


<i><b>Nga: </b></i><b>When do we have </b><i><b>history</b></i><b>?</b>


<i><b>Ba:</b></i><b>We have it on </b><i><b>tuesday</b></i><b> and </b><i><b>thursday</b></i>
<i><b>Nga</b></i>: When do we have <i><b>math</b></i><b>?</b>


<i><b>Ba:</b></i><b>We have it on </b><i><b>Monday</b></i><b> , </b><i><b>Wenesday</b></i><b> and </b>


<i><b>Friday</b></i><b>.</b>


<i><b>Nga: </b></i><b>Does Lan have math on </b><i><b>Friday?</b></i>


<i><b>Ba: </b></i><b>No, she </b><i><b>doesn t have</b></i>’ <b> math on Friday. She</b>


<i><b>has</b></i><b> it on </b><i><b>Saturday</b></i><b>.</b>


<i><b> </b><b>S + has + N (m«n häc) on + day</b></i>
<i><b> S + does not have +N (m. h) on + day</b></i>


<b> - Tell them about the short form of </b>
“does not”


- Ask students to copy the notes and
memorize.


<b>4.Practice: </b>


-Put Ly’s timetable on the board
Ly’s timetable



<i><b>T 2 </b></i> <i><b>T 3</b></i> <i><b>T 4</b></i> <i><b>T 5</b></i> <i><b>T 6</b></i> <i><b>T 7</b></i>


toán văn địa toán AV vn


toán văn AV sử toán văn


AV


-Run through the timetable.


- Point to and say the model sentences.


Group works.
- Say the English words .
- Listen to the teacher.


- Run forward and slap the correct words
on the board.


- Continue until students have slapped
all the words


- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.
- Notice the main stress pattern.
- Write the new words in their
notebooks.


- ss repeat the words , go to the board and


write what and where


- Listen to the teacher.
- Read the dialogue


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

<i>+ When does she have math ? </i>


<i> + She has it on Monday,Thursday and</i>
<i>Friday.</i>


-Correct their mistakes.


<b>5.Further practice: C2 (page 59</b>
<b>6.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary
and Simple present tense: The time, daily
routines, school timetable and weekly
timetable.


- Have them do some exercises in the
workbook (page 53 – 55) and prepare
Unit 5 - Lesson 7: GRAMMAR


<i>PRACTICE.</i>


-Read the timetable silently.
- Say the subjects in English.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.



- Make the questions and answers for
themselves.


- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.


- copy the T’s requests
- mark the ex to do at home.
*Teacher’s evaluation:


...
...
...
...
...


Teaching date: .11.08


<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 5: THINGS I DO</b>


<i> </i><b>Lesson 31: GRAMMAR PRACTICE</b>
<b>A.Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use grammar points above fluently and
Further practice in simple present tense, Telling the time, Adjective with “ Be”, Question
words, School Subjects, Days of the week in exercises.


<b>B.Teaching aids:</b>



Pictures, books , poster
<b>C. Methods:</b>


- Practice speaking and writing skills.
<b>D. Procedures:</b>


Teacher’s activities SS’ activities
<b>1. Warmer:</b>


<b>Picture drill - Time:</b>


a) 7.00 d) 12.00


b) 9.15 e) 1.45
c) 4.30 f) 8.50
- Run through the pictures.


- Hold up the first picture and say the model
sentences:


<i> +What time is it? </i>
<i> + It s six o clock. ’</i> <i>’</i>


- Do the same for the seccond picture.
- Correct their mistakes.


- Look at the pictures.
- Listen to the teacher.



- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

<b>2. Practice: Simple present tense</b>
<b> * Gap fill</b>


- Have students read exercises 1, 7 on page
60, 61 and fill in the blanks with the correct
form of the verbs.


<i><b>1a) get/get, get/gets, get/get.</b></i>


<i><b>1b) do/have/have, does/have/has.</b></i>
<i><b>1c) do/go</b>…, does/go/goes.</i>


<i><b>1d) do/wash/../does/wash/washes.</b></i>


<i><b>7 a)gets b)takes c)brushes d)has e)goes.</b></i>
<b>* Adjectives: Word cue drill</b>


- Run through the cues.


- Hold up the first cues and say the model
sentences.


<i>- Is your { house } big ? </i>
<i> - Yes,it is / No, it isn t.’</i>



- Do the same for the second cue.
- house.
- school


- city.
- country.
- street.
- family.


- living room.
* Lucky numbers


- Write the numbers on the board.
<b>1 2 3 4 5 6</b>
1. c). When do you have geography?
<b> 2. a) When do you have literature?.</b>
<b> 3. Lucky number.</b>


<b> 4. d) Which classes do you have on</b>
Friday / Monday?


5. Lucky number.


6. b) When do you have math?
<b>3. Further practice:</b>


<b>* Nought and crosses</b>
- Put the grid on the board.


- Divide class into teams. One is noughts


(O) and the other is Crosses (X).


- Two teams choose any things in the boxes
and ask questions about what things are .
- The team which has three noughts or three
crosses on a line will win the game.


- i) What time do you do your
<i>homework?</i>


<i>- gives feed back.</i>
<b>4.Homework:</b>


-Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary
and Simple present tense


- Have them prepare Unit 6 - Lesson 1:
Understanding the details and practising
country vocabulary.


- Work individually.
- Read exercise 1, 2, 3.


- Complete the sentences with the correct
form of To be.


- Do exercises orally.
- Look at the cues.
- Listen to the teacher.



- Repeat it chorally and then individually.


- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.


- Look at the board.
- Work in teams.


- Take turn to choose the numbers.
- Answer the questions.


- Look at the board.
- Work in groups.


- One is noughts (O) and the other is
Crosses (X).


- Choose any phrases in the boxes, ask and
ask questions about what they do … ( Use
every morning / afternoon / evening in their
questions ).


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher ‘s requests
*Teacher’s evaluation:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

Teaching date: .11 .08

<b>UNIT 6: </b>

<b>PLACES</b>




<i> </i><b>Lesson 1/32</b>: <b>OUR HOUSE (AI A3)</b>–


<i><b>A.I.Aim: </b></i>


Help students understand the details and practice country vocabulary.


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the content of the text and
use country vocabulary fluently.


<b>B. Teaching aids: </b>
Pictures


<b>C. Methods: practice speaking and writing skills.</b>
D. Procedures:


Teacher’s activities SS’activities


<b>1. Warm up: </b>


<b> </b>

<b> </b>


<b>Shark’s attack</b>


<b>H O U S E</b>


- Divide the class into two teams.


- Ask each team for a letter in the alphabet.
- Ask students from each team to guess the
word.



- The game countinues until students
find out the word.


<b>2 .Pre - reading: </b>
<b> +Vocabulary:</b>


a lake : cái hồ.
a river : con sông.
Trees : cây cối.
Flowers : bông hoa.
a rice paddy : cánh đồng.
a park : công viên.


-checking: <b>What and where</b>


- Elicit the vocabulary from the students
and write them in the circles.


- Get students to repeat the words
including the rubbed out words by
pointing at the empty circle.


<b>+Open prediction</b>


- Show students the things and ask: +
What’s near Thuy’s


house?



- Work in teams.
-Look at the board.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Give a letter in the alphabet.
- Have to try to guess the word.
- Find out the word.


- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.


- Students repeat chorally and remember
all the words.


- Go to the board and fill in the circles
with the right words.


- Listen to the teacher and answer the
questions:


+ a lake, a river, a park…


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

- Ask students to write three things in
their books.


<b>3. While reading:</b>



- Ask students to read the text and check
their prediction.


- Ask students to reread the text by
themselves.


<b>Matching</b>


- Put the Vietnamese translation and
English words on the board.


-Ask students to match English words with
the Vietnamese translation .


- Ask students to work in teams.


<b>Lucky numbers</b>


- Write the numbers on the board.


- Divide class into teams. The teams take
turn to choose the numbers.


- Tell students that they have to answer
the questions .


<b>1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8</b>
<b> 1. c)</b>. What’s her brother’s name ?



<b> 2. a)</b> How old is Thuy?.


<b> 3.</b> <i>Lucky number</i>. <b>8.</b><i>Lucky number</i>.


<b> 4. d)</b> How old is he?


<b>5. e) </b>Where does Thuy live?
<b>6. b)</b> What does she do?


<b>7. f) </b>What’s there, near the house


<b>4. Post reading: </b>


<b>Picture drill</b>


a) Trees d) a park


b) a rice paddy e) a river
c) a lake f) a house


- ask the ss to Run through the pictures.
- Hold up the first picture and say the
model sentences:


<i> +What are those / is that? </i>
<i> +They are…… / it is…… </i>


- Do the same for the seccond picture.



- Read the text and check their prediction.
- Reread the text by themselves.


<b>Group works.</b>


- Lookl at the board.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Work in teams.


- Come to the board and match English
words with the Vietnamese translation.
- Look at the board.


- Work in teams.


- Take turn to choose the numbers.
- Answer the questions.


Minh
12
20


in a house
a student


river, rice paady , park


- Look at the pictures.
- Listen to the teacher.
- run through the cues



- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.


- Practice in pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

- Correct their mistakes.


<b>5.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart
vocabulary.


- Have them write the answers in the
notebook and prepare Unit 6 -
Lesson 2:(<i>A4-A5)</i>: Describing places
where we live


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests.


 T’s evaluation :


...
...
...
...
.


Teaching date: .


11.08


<b> UNIT 6: </b>

<b>PLACES</b>



<i><b> </b></i><b>Lesson 2/33: OUR HOUSE (A4 A5)</b>–


<i><b> </b></i>


A. Aim: Help students know town and country vocabulary for describing places where we
live.


- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use town and country
vocabulary to describe places where we live grammar points above fluently.
B. Teaching aids: Pictures and cassette


C.Methods:


practice speaking
<b> D.. Procedures:</b>


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> SS activities</b>’
<b>1.Revision: </b>


<b>Bingo</b>
- Put the table on the board.


-Ask students to choose any four words in
a, b, c and copy them into their books.


- Let students listen to the cassette.


<b>2 .Presentation: </b>


<b> +Vocabulary:</b>
- a town : thitrÊn.
- a village : lµng , x·
- a city :thµnh phè
- the country : miỊn quª
<b>+ Checking vocabulary:</b>
<b> lµng,x· </b>
miỊn quª



thÞ trÊn , phè


thành phố
cánh đồng


<b>3. Practice: A5 (page 64)</b>
<b>Picture drill</b>


Look at the board.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Choose any four words.


- Put ticks next to the words that they listen
to.


- Shouts “Bingo”.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.



- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.
<b>Group works.</b>


- Say the Vietnamese translation .
- Listen to the teacher.


- Run forward and slap the correct words on
the board.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

a) a hotel d) a lake


b) trees e) a school
c) a river f) a rice paddy
- Run through the pictures.


- Hold up the first picture and say the model
sentences:


<i> +There s ’</i> <i>a hotel near our house.</i>
<i> + They are trees near our house. </i>
- Do the same for the seccond picture.
- Correct their mistakes.


<b>4.Further practice: - A5, page 64:</b>
- a hotel - trees



- a river - a lake
- a school - rice paddy


<b>Write it up</b>


- Ask students to write 4 - 6 sentenses about
their place.


cã bao nhiªu cách nói về các sự vật ở gần?
There is/are... near...


... is near ...
- Do the model.


+ There is a hotel near our house.


<b>5.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary
and Simple present tense


- Have them prepare Unit 6 - Lesson 3:
Reading a text about where Minh lives.


- Look at the pictures.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.



- Some pairs practice in front.


Look at the board.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Students to write 4 – 6 sentenses about
their place


- ss say about their places.
ex: my house is near a ...
there is a... near my house.
there are ... near my house


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher requests.
<b>* T s evaluation:</b>’


...
...
...
...
...




Teaching date: .11.08


<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 6: </b>

<b>PLACES</b>




<b>Lesson 3/34</b>: <b>IN THE CITY (BI B4)</b>–


<i> </i>


<b>A.Aim:</b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand town vocabulary.


Reading a text about where Minh lives to understand town vocabulary and prepositon
of place.


<b>B.. Teaching aids: Poster and Textbook</b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

<b>D.. Procedures:</b>


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’


<b>1. Warm up: Rub out words</b>


<i>Houses</i> and <i>parks</i>,
<i>Flowers</i> and <i>trees</i>,
<i>Lakes</i> and <i>rivers</i>,
We <i>love these</i>.


<b>2 .Pre - reading: </b>
<b> +Vocabulary:</b>


- a store : cửa hàng.
- a restaurant : nhà hàng.


- a temple : đền, miếu.
- a hospital : bệnh viện.
- a factory : nhà máy.


- a museum : nhà bảo tàng.
- a stadium : sân vận động.


<b>True / Fasle Prediction</b>


- Set the scene: Lan is talking to Mai
about Minh.


- Now, read the statements and guess they
are true or fasle.


- Ask students to write True/ Fasle in
their books.


<b>3. While reading: B1, page 66:</b>
<b> a) </b>F <b>d) </b>T


<b> b) </b>T <b>e) </b>F


<b> c) </b>F <b>f) </b>F


- Ask students to read the text and check
their prediction.


- Ask students to reread the text by
themselves.



<b>Lucky numbers</b>


- Write the numbers on the board.


- Divide class into teams. The teams take
turn to choose the numbers.


<b>4.Post reading: </b>


<b>Bingo</b>


- Put the table on the board.


- Practice saying the dialogue.


- Remember te rubbed out words and
keep practicing it.


- Repeat the rubbed out words from
memory.


- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.
- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.


- Put attention to the teacher:



- Read the statements on the board and
guess which statements are true and
which are fasle.


-write T / F in their books


- Read the text and check their
prediction.


- Reread the text by themselves.
- Look at the board.


- Work in teams.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

<b> a) </b>museum.


<b> b) </b>bookstore.


<b> c) </b>river.
<b>d) </b>street.


-Ask students to choose any four words in
a, b, c or d and copy them into their books.
- Let students listen to the cassette and
correct.


<b>5.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart town
vocabulary.



- Have them prepare Unit 6 - Lesson
4:(<i>B4)</i>: Practising prepositions of
place.


- Read the words in the table.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Choose any four words.


- Put ticks next to the words that they
listen to.


- Shouts “Bingo”.


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests.


Teaching date: .11.08


<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 6: </b>

<b>PLACES</b>



<i><b> </b></i><b>Lesson 4/35: C1-2</b>


<i><b> </b></i>


<b>A.Aim:</b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use prepositions of place: in front of,
behind, to the left / right of to describe the position of a house.



<b>B. Teaching aids:</b>


Picture, Poster and cards
<b>C. Methods : </b>


Practice speaking
<b>D. Procedures:</b>


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Revision:</b>


<b> - Where do you live?</b>


- Is there a ………… near / next to
?


……


<b>2 .Presentation: </b>
<b> +Vocabulary:</b>


- in front of : phÝa tríc
- behind : phÝa sau.
- to the left: bên trái
- to the right: bên phải
<b> +Matching</b>


- Put the Vietnamese translation and
English



words on the board.
- in - gÇn
- on - trong
- near - c¹nh
- next to - trªn


- Ask students to match English words with
the Vietnamese translation .


- Ask students to work in teams


-Answer the teacher’s questions about their
places


- Students – Teacher.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the main stress pattern.
- Write the new words in their n
books.


Look at the board.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Work in teams.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

<b>+Presentation picture.</b>


- Set the scene: We are talking about a


house.


- Point to the things and ask them to tell the
names of the things around.


<i>In front of the house, there is a big yard.</i>
<i>Behind the house, there are tall trees.</i>
<i>Behind the tall trees, there are mountains.</i>
<i>To the left of the house, there is a well.</i>
<i>To the right of the house, there are flowers.</i>
- Ask them to read by themselves.


- Let some of the students read aloud and
give the Vietnamese translation of the
words: well, mountain.


<b>3. Practice: </b>


Picture drill C1p.68
a.yard/front /house


b. tall trees/ behind / house
c.moutain/ behind /trees
d.well/ left/house


e.flowers / right/ house
f.house/front/trees


-ask the ss to run through the pictures.
- Hold up the first picture and say the model


sentences:


<i> +Where are the mountains? </i>
<i> + They are behind the house. </i>
- Do the same for the seccond picture.
- Correct their mistakes.


<b>4. Further practice:</b>
<b>Matching</b>


- Ask them to look at the pictures.


Let students listen to the cassette and find
the right picture.


<b>a) Which is Ba’s house? </b>
b) Which is Lan’s house?
c) Which is Tuan’s house?


- gives some pictures and ask the ss to
describe it


-gives feedback.
<b>5.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary
and how to describe the position of the
house.


- do exC1,2,3 p.63,64,65- work book: miêu


tả con mèo ở vị trí nào so với cái hộp.


- Have them prepare Unit 6 - Lesson 6:
Prepositions of place to describe a
street .


- Listen to the teacher’s explanation.
- Tell the names of the things around.
- Read the text by themselves.


- Some of students read the text aloud.


- Look at the pictures.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.


- Look at the pictures.


- Students listen to the cassette and try
to find out which picture is Ba’s, Lan’s
or Tuan’s house.


A
B
B



- work in pairs : say the position of some
things


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher requests.


 T’s evaluation :


...
...
...
...
...


Teaching date: 24.11.08


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

<i> Lesson 5/36: AROUND THE HOUSE (C3-C4)</i>
<i> </i>


<b>A.Aim:</b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “Where is … / are …?” Questions
and answers with town vocabulary and prepositions of place to describe a street.


<b>B. Teaching aids: Cassette and pictures</b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking and writing
<b>D. Procedures:</b>



Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’


<b>1. Revision:</b>
- C1 (page 68)


<b>Picture</b>


- Show the picture and tell students to ask
questiuons and answer.


<b>2 .Presentation: </b>
<b> +Vocabulary:</b>


- the drugstore: hiệu thuốc tây.
- the stoystore: cửa hàng đồ chơi
- the movie theater: rạp chiếu phim.
- the police station: đồn công an
- the bakery: lị , tiệm bánh mì
- Between: ở giữa


- Oposite:đối diện.
<b>+ Checking vocabulary:</b>


Rub out and remember


-Point to the Vietnamese translations and
rub out English words.


- Get students to call the English words.


<b>Presentation text.</b>


- Set the scene: They are talking about their
town.


- Ask students to listen to the text about the
town.


<b> - Isolate the model sentences by answering</b>
the questions:


<b> - C3 (page 70)</b>


<i><b> +Where is the photocopy store?</b></i>
+ It is next to the bakery.


<i> +Where are the children?</i>
<i> + They are in the bookstore.</i>
<i><b> Where is / are the </b><b>………</b><b>?</b></i>
<i><b> It is </b><b>………</b><b> / They are </b><b>…</b><b>. </b></i>
<i>- hái vÞ trÝ</i>


<b>3. Practice: </b>
<b> Picture drill</b>


- ask the ss to run through the pictures.
- Hold up the first picture and say the model
sentences:


<i> +Where is the bakery? </i>



<i> + It is next to the movie theater . </i>
- Do the same for the seccond picture.
- Correct their mistakes.


<b> Guessing game </b>
<i><b>- C4 - b - (page 70) </b></i>


<b>Pair works</b>


- Look at the picture.


- Ask questions and answer about
Thuy’s house.


- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.
- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.


- Students repeat chorally and remember
all the English words.


- Call the English words and write the
English words if there is time.


- Listen to the teacher’s explanation.
- Listen to the text about the town.



- Answer the questions.


- Understand of the target language in
term of meaning, use and form by
answering the questions.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

1) It’s opposite the bakery.


2) It’s between the bakery and the
drugstore.


3) It’s next to the bakery.
4) It’s opposite the bookstore.
5) It’s next to the movie theater.
<b>4.Further practice: C5 (page 71)</b>


Survey


<i><b>Na..</b></i> <i><b>in </b></i>
<i><b>fro..</b></i> <i><b>be </b><b>-hin</b></i>


<i><b>d</b></i>


<i><b></b></i>


<i><b>opp-osite</b></i> <i><b>..left </b><b>of</b></i> <i><b>righ-t </b><b>of</b></i> <i><b>near</b></i>


- Get students to fill in their real things(only
the 5 subjects they have learnt in English).
- Get them to practice in pairs:



+ What s ’ <i>in front of your house?</i>
<i> + A rice paddy.</i>


- Feedback.
<b>5.Homework</b>


- Ask students to review vocabulary and
Grammar points (Unit4 – Unit6) , to do
exercises in the workbook from page 60 to
63.


- Have them prepare 45’ Test


- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.


- Look at the board.


-A student to come to the front and
choose one of the things.


- The rest of the class to guess which
thing it is.



* Student1: It’s next to the movie theater.
What is it?


* Student2: It’s the police station.
* Student1:Yes, That’s right.


- Fill in their real things (only the 5
subjects they have learnt in English).
- Practice in pairs.


- Tell the teacher what they have
asked their partner, e.g.<i>“There is a </i>
<i>rice paddy in front of Lan’s </i>


<i>house………</i>


- Review vocabulary and Grammar
points (Unit1 – Unit3) , to do exercises in
the exercise book from page 22 to 25.
- Prepare 45’ Test carefully.


 T’s evaluation:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>


<b>45- minute Test(2)</b>



<b> Name: ... class: 6a</b>
<b> </b>


<b>I. Nghe råi</b> <b> hoàn thành các ý sau :(2ms)</b>


1. Mai lives...


2. She is a...


3. Her brother is a ...


4. There are ...near their house.
II Chọn một đáp án đúng nhất(2.5ms):
1. There are many _____ near our house.


a. tree b. trees c. hotel d. a tree
2. Tam ____ in a village.


a. lives b. live c. to live
3. ____ Minh get ut at 6.00? – Yes, he does.


a. Do b. Is c. Does


4. ____ time is it? – It’s 10.00.


a. When b. who c. What


5. Does he ____ breakfast at 6.45?


a. have b. has c. haves
6. There is a ____ next to Lan’s house.


a. river b. rivers c. many lakes


7. The well is of the house.



a. the left b. in front c. near d.next


8. a.it’s two o’clock and fifteen b. It’s two fifteen o’clock . c. it s two fifteen
III. Đọc đoạn văn rồi hoàn thành các bài tập phía dới (3ms)


Nam lives in Ha Noi with his mother, father and sister. Their house is next to a
bookstore. On the street, there is a temple, a hotel and a park. Near his house, there is a
restaurant, a hospital and a stadium. Nam’s father ‘s a doctor. His mother is a nurse. Nam
and his sister are students.


<i>1. Write True / False before each sentence:</i>
____ a. Nam lives in the country.


____ b. There are four people in his family.
____ c. Next to his house, there is a store.
____ d. Near his house, there is a restaurant.
<i>2. Answer the questions:</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

1.left /house there /be /street.->...


2. We / History/ Tuesday. -> ...
3.Lan /Math / friday? ->...


4.there/be / trees/ front /my house. -> ...
5.Nga /do /home work /every evening . ->...

<b> </b>






Teaching date : .11.08


<b> UNIT 7: </b>

<b>YOUR HOUSE</b>



<i> </i><b>Lesson 1/38: IS YOUR HOUSE BIG? (AI – A2)</b>


<b>A. Aim:.</b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the details ,listen to a
dialogue and reading a letter about a house to understand the details.


<b> B. Teaching aids</b>: Poster and cassette


<b>C.Methods</b>:


Practice listening and reading skills.


<b> D. Procedures</b>:


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’


<b>1.Revision: - A1, page 72</b>
<b>Predict Grid</b>


- Set the scene: Ba is talking about his
daily activities .


- Have students copy the table.


<i><b>Yes</b></i> <i><b>No</b></i>



<i>…………</i>
<i>big?</i>


<i>…… small?</i>
<i>……a </i>
<i>yard?</i>
<i>……a well?</i>
<i>…flowers?</i>
<i>………</i>
<i>trees?</i>


- Get students to guess about Ba’s daily
activities by writing the time in figures.
-Let them listen to the cassette.


<b>2 .Pre - reading: </b>
<b>+Vocabulary:</b>


a garden : khu vườn.
a vegetable : rau.


- Listen to the teacher.


- Pay attention to the teacher’s
explanation.


- copy the table.


- Guess about Ba’s daily activities by


writing the time in figures.


- Listen to the cassette.


- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.
- Notice the main stress pattern.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

a photo : bức ảnh.


<b> Checking vocabulary</b>


<b>Slap the board</b>


- Put the Vietnamese translation on the
board.


- Call two students of two teams to the
front of the class.


- Call out one of English words in loud
voice.


<b>True / Fasle Prediction</b>


- Set the scene: Hoa is talking to Minh
about her house.


<b>A2 (page 72)</b>



<b>a) </b>The house is in the country.


<b>b) </b>There’s a river near the house.


<b>c) </b>There are strees to the left of the
house.


<b>d) </b>There are two gardends.


- ask the ss to read the statements and
guess they are true or fasle.


- Ask students to write True/ Fasle in their
books.


<b>3. While reading: A2, page 72:</b>


- Ask students to read the text and check
their prediction.


<b> a) </b>T <b>c) </b>F


<b> b) </b>F <b>d) </b>T


-Ask students to reread the text by
themselvesand do <b>Matching</b>


<i><b>a)</b></i> Is there a flower garden in front …?


<i><b>b)</b></i> Is the house beautiful?



<i><b>c)</b></i> Is there a flower garden behind …?


<i><b>d)</b></i> Is the lake to the right of the house?


<i><b>e)</b></i> Is Nga in the city?


<i><b>A)</b></i> Yes, it is.


<i><b>B)</b></i> No, it isn’t.


<i><b>C)</b></i> No, she isn’t.


<i><b>D)</b></i> Yes, there is.


<i><b>E)</b></i> No, there isn’t.


- Let some students read the letter aloud.
-Ask students to match the questions and


<b>Group works.</b>


- Say the Vietnamese translation .


- Run forward and slap the correct words
on the board.


- Continue until students have slapped all
the words



-Put attention to the teacher:


- Read the statements on the board and
guess which statements are true and
which are fasle.


-write T / F in their books.


-Read the text and check their prediction.


<b> a) </b>T <b>c) </b>F


<b> b) </b>F <b>d) </b>T
- Reread the text by themselves.


<b>Group work</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

answers .


- Ask students to work in teams.


- Ask them to copy the letter and do the
exercise in the notebooks.


<b>4.Post reading: </b>


<b>Transformation Writing</b>
<b> My House</b>


<b> </b>There is a flower garden in front of the


house. There’s a vegetable garden behind
the house. To the left of the house, there’s
a lake. To right of the house, there are tall
trees. Here is a photo.


- Ask students to change the underlined
information to descride their own house
and then draw a picture of it as a photo
from the main text of the letter.


- corrects some letters.


<b>5.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart town
vocabulary.


- Have them prepare Unit 7 - Lesson 2:
(<i> A3-5)</i>: Facilities vocabulary with “Is/are
there …”


- Copy the letter and write the questions
and


answers in the notebooks.


- lookat the model letter.


- Students change the underlined



information to descride their own house
and then draw a picture of it as a photo
from the main text of the letter.


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests.


 T’s evaluation:


<i>...</i>
<i>...</i>
<i>...</i>
<i>...</i>


<i> </i>Teaching date. . 11.08


<b> UNIT 7: </b>

<b>YOUR HOUSE</b>



<b>Lesson 2/39: A3 – A5</b>


<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use facilities vocabulary with “Is there
a… / are there any…?” and short answer to describe the town.


B. Teaching aids: Pictures and poster
<b>C.Methods: </b>



Help students know facilities vocabulary with “Is there a… / are there any…?” and
short answer.


D. Procedures:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

- Ask students to pick out a piece of paper.
- Ask them to listen to the teacher and
draw.


<b> “ There s a house. Behind the house </b>’
<i><b>there mountains. To the left of the house </b></i>
<i><b>there s a tree. In front of the house </b></i>’


<i><b>there s a river. To the right of the house a </b></i>’
<i><b>man is driving a bike.” </b></i>


<b>2 . Presentation: </b>
<b> +Vocabulary:</b>


- a bank : ngân hàng.
- a clinic : phòng khám
- a post office : bu điện
- a suppermarket : siêu thị
- Shops : cưa hµng.
<b>+ Checking vocabulary:</b>


<b> What and where</b>
<b> lµng x·</b>





thị trấn


thành phố
cưa hµng


- Elicit the vocabulary from the students
and write them in the circles.


- Get students to repeat the words including
the rubbed out words by pointing at the
empty circle.


<b>Rub out & remember dialogue</b>
- Set the scene: Nga is asking Nam about
some thing around her house.


- Put the dialogue on the board .
<i><b>Nam: </b></i>What is this ?


<i><b>Nga: </b></i>It is a hotel.


<i><b>Nam: </b></i>What are those?


<i><b>Nga: </b></i>They are trees.


<i><b>Nam: </b></i> Is there a hotel near your house?



<i><b>Nga: </b></i>Yes, there is.


<i><b>Nam: </b></i>Are there any trees near your house?


<i><b>Nga: </b></i>No, there aren’t.


- Rub out some of the words .


- Get students to isolate the model
sentence.


- Ask students some questions
+ Is there a hotel near Nga’s house?
+ Are there any trees near her house?


<b>3. Practice: A3, page 74</b>
<b>Picture drill</b>


- ask the ss to run through the pictures
a) hotel e) restuarant


- Students to pick out a piece of paper.
- Listen to the teacher and draw.


- Make their own pictures and dictate
them to a partner.


-listen to the T
-read the words
- copy the words



- Students repeat chorally and remember all
the words.


- Go to the board and fill in the circles with
the right words.


- Practice saying the dialogue.


- Remember te rubbed out words and keep
practicing it.


- Repeat the rubbed out dialogue from
memory.


- Isolate the model sentence.
- Answer the questions
+ Yes, there is.


+ No, there aren’t.


- Copy the notes and memorize:


<i><b>- Is there a </b><b>………</b><b> ?</b></i>
<i><b> - Yes, there is / No, there isn t.</b></i>’


<i><b> - Are there any </b><b>………</b><b>?</b></i>
<i><b> - Yes, there are / No, there aren t. </b></i>’


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>

b) flowers f) hospital


c) bank g) post office


d) supermarket h) police station
- Hold up the first picture and say the
model sentences:


<i> +Is there a hotel near your </i>
<i> house? </i>


<i> + Yes, there is / No, there isn t. </i>’
<b>4. Further practice: Guessing game</b>


Show them the pictures. Ask them to
choose one of the houses.


<b> A4, page 74</b>
<b> - House a)</b>
- House b)
- House c)


A5, page 75: (House a)


<i> There are some mountains behind the </i>
<i>house. There are some trees to the right. </i>
<i>There s a lake to the left. </i>’


- Get the rest of the class to guess which
house they choose. The first student
guesses the house correctly comes up to
the front, chooses a new house and the


game continues.


- Ask them to listen to the cassette and try
to find out which house it is.


<b>5.Homework:</b>


<b> - Facilities vocabulary.</b>


<i><b> - Is there a ………</b></i>
<i>?</i>


<i> - Yes, there is / No, there isn t.</i>’


<i> - Are there any ………?</i>
<i> - Yes, there are / No, there aren t</i>’ <i>.</i>


- Exercises in the workbook from page 64


to 65.


- Unit 7: Your House – TOWN OR
<i>COUNTRY? - Lesson 3 : B1.</i>


- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.



- Some pairs practice in front


- Students look at the pictures and choose
one of the houses the teacher shows .


- The rest of the class asks him or her
question to find which house he or she
chooses.


<i>* Are there any trees? / Are they behind the</i>
<i>house? / Is it house b? </i>


* Yes, it is.


- Listen to the cassette and try to find out
which house it is.


- Take notes and memorize


- Do homework as the teacher suggests.


 <i>T’s evaluation:</i>


<i>...</i>
<i>...</i>
<i>...</i>
<i>...</i>


Teaching date: 4.12.08

<b> UNIT 7: </b>

<b>YOUR HOUSE</b>




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

<b> </b>


<b> A.Aim : </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read a text about Ba’s and Chi’s house
and understand the differences between town and country.


B. Teaching aids:


Textbook, picture, poster
<b>C.Methods:</b>


- practice speaking and writing skill
<b>D. Proceduces:</b>


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Revision: Hangman</b>


<b> _ _ _ _ _ _ (stores)</b>
_ _ _ _ (bank)


_ _ _ _ _ _ _ (flowers)


_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (supermarket)
- gives feedback.


<b>2 .Pre - reading: </b>
<b> +Vocabulary:</b>
noisy : ồn ào.


quiet :yên lặng.
an aparment :căn hộ .
a market :chợ.


a zoo : vên thó


paddy field = rice paddy: cánh đồng lúa.
<b>+ Checking vocabulary:</b>


<b> Rub out and remember</b>


-Point to the Vietnamese translations and
rub out English words.


- Get students to call the English words.
<b>Kim s game</b>’


- Have students look at the pictures of Ba’s
and Chi’s house (Page 76, 77) in 20 seconds
and try to remember as many facilities as
possible.


- Divide class into two groups.


- Put away the pictures and ask students to
go to the board and write the facilities
they’ve seen from memory.


<b>3. While reading: B1, page 76, 77:</b>



- Ask students to read the text and check
their writing.


- Ask students to reread the text by
themselves.


What do you say to ask if Ba and Chi lived
in the town or in the country?


What is the form?


What is the form used for?
- ask the ss to do Matching


- Students take turn to guess the letters of
the words.


- Give a letter in the alphabet.
- Have to try to guess the word.
- Find out the word.


- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.
- Students repeat chorally and remember all
the English words.



- Call the English words and write the
English words if there is time.


- Look at the pictures of Ba’s and Chi’s
house (Page 76, 77) and try to remember as
many facilities as possible.


- Work in groups.


- Read the text and check their prediction.
<i><b>*Ba s house: </b></i>’ <i> a supermarket, a post office,</i>
<i>a bank, a clinic, a market and a zoo. </i>
<i><b> *Chi s house: </b></i>’ <i> trees and flowers, a river, </i>
<i>a lake and paddy fields.</i>


- Reread the text by themselves.
Do you live in the country,Ba?
No, I live in town.


Does Chi live in town?
No, she lives in the country.
<i><b>Do / Does + S + V + ...?</b></i>
<i><b> Yes, S + Do/does.</b></i>


<i><b>No, S + don t/doesn t</b></i>’ ’ <b>.</b>


- Hỏi và trả lời có phải ai đó làm gì ....
không


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

<i><b>a) </b></i>Does Ba live in town? -Yes, he does.


<i><b>b) </b></i>Does he live in a house? - No, he doesn t.’
<i><b>c) </b></i>Is it noisy? –<i><b> Yes, it is.</b></i>


<i><b>d) </b></i>Does Chi live in town? - No, she doesn t.’
<i><b>e) </b></i>Are there any stores? - No, there aren t.’
<i><b>f) </b></i>Is it quiet? -Yes, it is.
- Let some students read the letter aloud.
-Ask students to match the questions and
answers .


-Ask students to work in teams.


- Ask them to copy the letter and do the
exercise in the notebooks.


<b>4.Further practice:</b>


<b>Find someone who</b>


- Put the table on the board.


<i><b>Find someone who</b></i>


<i><b>lives…</b></i> <i><b>Name</b></i>


<i>………in town?</i> <i>Lan</i>


<i>………in the country?</i>
<i>………near a lake?</i>
<i>………next to a market?</i>


<i>………opposite a paddy</i>
<i>field?</i>


<i>………near a post office?</i>


Get students to get into groups.


- Get students to ask each other questions.
+ Teacher: <i>Do you live in town?</i>


+ Student (Lan): <i>Yes, I do.</i>


- Correct if there are any mistakes.
- Feedback.


<b>5. Homework:</b>


- ask the ss to learn the words , learn the
form of yes/no question by heart .


- write five sentences about things around
your houses


<b>Group work</b>


- Some ss read aloud as the teacher asks.
- Do the exercise, then read aloud.


- Work in teams.



- Copy the letter and write the questions
and answers in the notebooks.


Look at the board.


- Work in groups.


- Stand up and ask each orther questions.
When they find someone who says “Yes”
they fill in the name. They can’t fill in
someone’s name more than once.


- Tell the teacher what they have found,
e.g. <i>“ Lan lives in town. ……… ”.</i>


- copy the T’s requests.


 T’s evaluation:


...
...
...
...


Teaching date: .12.08


Lesson 41: correcting the test
<b>A.A im : </b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

<b>B. Teaching aids;</b>
Test papers


<b>C.Methods:</b>


Give the remarks to the test, correct the test and give the answer key of the test.
<b>D. Proceduces:</b>


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>I.Remarks:</b>


- nhìn chung các em nắm đợc kiến thức
ngữ pháp để làm bài.


- cụ thể: nắm đợc cách dùng danh từ số
ít , số nhiều , cách dùng there is/ are ,
cách đặt câu hỏi và trả lời câu hỏi.
- Tuy nhiên, với dạng bài tp dựng t


gợi ý hoàn thành câu các em lµm cha
tèt.


- Lớp 6 đạt kết quả cao, còn lớp 6
nhiều em kết quả còn thấp.


<b>II. Answer key:</b>
Part 1: 2 points
Listening ;
1T



2F -> student
3F -> student
4T


part 2: 2,5 points


1. there are many trees near our house.
2. Tam lives in a village.


3. Doe<b> s Minh get up at 6.00?</b>
4. Wha<b> t time is it?</b>


5. Does he have breakfast at 6.45?
6. There is a river next to Lan’s house.
7. The well is in front of the house.
8. it s two fifteen’ .


part 3: 3 points


1.aF -> in Hanoi/ in the city
bT


cF -> bookstore
dT


2. a. Nam lives in Hanoi.
b. he is a doctor.


c. yes, he is.
part 4;2,5 points



1. to the left of the house there is a street.
2. We have history on tuesday.


3. Does Lan have Math on friday?
4. there are trees in front of the house .
5. Nga does her homework every


evening.
<b>III. Results:</b>
Lớp 6 :


tốt : ...%
khá:...%
tbình:...%
Lớp 6 :


tốt ; ...%
khá:...%


-nghe và rút kinh nghiệm trong viƯc lµm bµi
kiĨm tra.


- copy the key in the notebooks.
Part 1: 2 points


Listening ;
1T


2F -> student


3F -> student
4T


part 2: 2,5 points


1. there are many trees near our house.
2. Tam lives in a village.


3. Doe<b> s Minh get up at 6.00?</b>
4. Wha<b> t time is it?</b>


5. Does he have breakfast at 6.45?
6. There is a river next to Lan’s house.
7. The well is in front of the house.
8. it s two fifteen’ .


part 3: 3 points


1.aF -> in Hanoi/ in the city
bT


cF -> bookstore
dT


2. a. Nam lives in Hanoi.
b. he is a doctor.


c. yes, he is.
part 4;2,5 points



6. to the left of the house there is a street.
7. We have history on tuesday.


8. Does Lan have Math on friday?
9. there are trees in front of the house .
10.Nga does her homework every


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

tb×nh:...%



 T’s evaluation :


...
...
...
...


Teaching date; .12.08
<b> UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE</b>


<b> Lesson 5/42: ON THE MOVE (CI </b>–<b> C2)</b>
<i><b>A</b></i>


<i><b> .Aim: : </b></i>


By the end of the lesson, students can talk about means of transport using the simple
present “How” question and “by car / bike train …”


<b>B. Teaching aids: Pictures and poster</b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>



Practice speaking
<b> D. Procedures :</b>


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Warm up: guessing game</b>


<b> I m going to </b><i>’</i> <i>………</i>
<b> - factory</b>


- museum
.


<i>- post office</i>
<i> </i>


<i> - stadium </i>
<b>2. Presentation: </b>
<b> +Vocabulary:</b>
bike : xe đạp
- walk :đi bộ.


motorbike : xe máy.
bus : xe buýt


car : ô tô
train : tàu hoả
plane :máy bay.


-Checking vocab.What and where



- Elicit the vocabulary from the students and
write them in the circles.


- Get students to repeat the words including
the rubbed out words by pointing at the
empty circle.


<b>+Dialogue build.</b>
- Set the scene.


- Read the dialogue and write few key words
on the board to help students remember what
the two speakers in the dialogue say to each
other .


- Get students to write in the missing words


<i>-ask the T questions and the T answer </i>
<i>* Are you going to the bank? </i>


<i>* No, I m not.’</i>
<i>* Yes, I am.</i>


- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.


-Students repeat chorally and remember all
the words.


- Go to the board and fill in the circles with
the right words.




-Answer the teacher’s question.


- Look at the board and listen to the teacher
carefully.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

on the board.


- Get students to isolate the model sentence.
<b>+ Target language: A5(page 54)</b>


<i><b>Ba: </b></i>What time do you usually go to school?


<i><b>Lan:</b></i> At 6.30 .


<i><b>Ba: </b>How do you go to school ? </i>


<i><b>Ba:</b></i> I go to school by bike .


<i><b>Ba:</b></i> How does Nga travel to school?


<i><b>Lan:</b></i> She travels by motorbike.



<i><b>- How do you + go / travel</b><b>…</b><b>?</b></i>
<b>- I + go / travel +DT ph¬ng tiƯn. </b>
<i><b>- How does he/she + go / travel</b><b>…</b><b>? </b></i>
<i><b>- He/she +goes / travels +DT p.t . </b></i>


<i><b>-hái ngêi nào đi bằng phơng tiƯn g×</b></i>
<i><b>3.Practice: </b></i>


<b> C2 on page 78 </b>–<b> 79 (11 picture </b>
<b> cues)</b>


- Lien / bike - Mrs Lan / plane
- Thu / motorbike -Mr Ba/ motorbike
- Tuan / bus - Miss Hoa / walk
- Hoa / car - Mr Kim / train
- Huong / walk - Mrs Dung / car
- Mr Hai / train


- Get students to repeat the question.


- Call out phrases to be changed in the
question:


<i> +What time does Ba get up?. </i>
<i> + go to school.</i>


- Do the same for the seccond picture.
- Correct their mistakes.


<b>4.Further practice:</b>


<b>Noughts and crosses</b>


<i><b>Mrs Dung</b></i> <i><b>Mrs Lan</b></i> <i><b>Mr Hai</b></i>


<i><b>Lien</b></i> <i><b>Thu</b></i> <i><b>Tuan</b></i>


<i><b>Mr Ba</b></i> <i><b>Mr Kim</b></i> <i><b>Miss</b><b><sub>Hoa</sub></b></i>


- Divide class into teams. One is noughts (O)
and the other is Crosses (X).


- Two teams choose any things in the boxes
and ask questions about what things are .
- The team which has three noughts or three
crosses on a line will win the game.


<b>5.Homework: </b>


- Ask students to learn by heart means of
transport with “How” question to talk about
transportation.


<b> - Vocabulary (means of transport).</b>


- Write in the missing words on the board.


- copy the forms:


<i><b>- How do you + (go / travel)</b><b>…</b><b>?</b></i>
<b>- I +(go / travel +DT ph¬ng tiƯn. </b>


<i><b>- How does he/she + (go / travel)</b><b>…</b><b>? </b></i>
<i><b>- He/she +goes / travels +DT p.t</b></i>


- read the cues


-Listen to the teacher and repeat after the
teacher.


- Make the change and repeat the new
question.


<i>+ What time does Ba get up?</i>
<i>+ What time does Ba go to school?</i>
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.


- Look at the board.
- Work in groups.


- One is noughts (O) and the other is Crosses
(X).


- Choose any phrases in the boxes, ask and
ask questions about where they live :


<i>+How does Lien go to school?</i>
<i>+ She goes by bike </i>


- Congratulate the winner.



- Take notes and memorize


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

<i><b> - How do you + go / travel</b>…?</i>
<i> - I +go / travel + DT ph¬ng tiƯn</i>
<i> - How does he/she + go / travel…?</i>
<i> - He/she +goes / travels + p.t . </i>


- Unit 7: Your House – ON THE MOVE -
Lesson 6 : C4-5.


 T’s evaluation:


...
...
...


Teaching date; .12.08

<b> UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE</b>



<i> Lesson 6/43: ON THE MOVE (C3 </i>–<b> C5)</b>
<b>A Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read a text about Hoang’s routine for
further pracitce in simple present habitual actions.


B. Teaching aids: Poster
<b>C. Methods;</b>


Practice reading


D. Procedures:


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1.Revision: </b>


<i><b>Find someone who</b></i> <i><b>Name</b></i>
<i>gets up at 5.30</i>


<i>……</i> <i>Lan</i>


<i>gets up at 6</i>
<i>……</i>


<i>walks to school</i>
<i>……</i>


<i>goes to school by bus</i>
<i>……</i>


<i>goes to school by bike</i>
<i>……</i>


- Get students to get into groups.


- Get students to ask each other questions.
+ T: Do you get up at 5.30?


+ S(Lan): Yes, I do.
<b>2 .Pre - reading: </b>
<b>Open prediction</b>



- Set the scene: Hoang is talking about his
routine.


- Show students the table and ask :
+What time does he get up?


- Ask students to predict what time Hoang
does the following things by answering the
questions.


<b>3. While reading: C4, page 80:</b>
<b> 5.30 11.30</b>
<i> 6.30 12.00</i>
<b> 7.00</b>


Ask students to read the text and check their
predictions.


- Ask students to reread the text by
themselves.


- Work in groups.


- Stand up and ask each orther questions.
When they find someone who says “Yes”
they fill in the name. They can’t fill in
someone’s name more than once.


- Tell the teacher what they have found,


e.g. <i>“ Lan gets up at 5.30……… ” .</i>


- Listen to the teacher.


- Read the table and answer the teacher’s
questions:


+ He gets up at 6.


-Predict what time Hoang does the
following things by answering the
questions.


- Read the text and check their
predictions.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>

<b>Reading comprehension</b>


<b>1 2 3 4 </b>
<b>5 6 7 8 </b>


<b>1e) What time does classes start?</b>
<b>2c) Does he goes to school by car?</b>
<b>3 Lucky number. </b>


<b>4f) What time do they end?</b>
<b>5 Lucky number. </b>


<b>6b) What time does he go to school?</b>
<b>7a) What time does Hoang get up?</b>


<b>4.Post reading</b>


<b>write it up</b>


- ask the ss to write up the sentences in lucky
number


<b>- the ask the ss to say about themselves</b>
<b>5.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart town and
country vocabulary.


<b> - Some homework in the workbook </b>
(page 66, 67, 68 and 69).


- Unit 8: Out and About – Lesson 1:
<i>WHAT ARE YOU DOING? (A1) </i>


<b>Group work</b>


- Some read aloud as the teacher asks.
- choose any numbers and answer the
questions .


- Work in teams.


a.Hoang gets up at...
b.He goes to school at...
c.No, he doesn’t.



e. his classes start at ...
d. L>N.


f. The classes end at ...
- ss write the sentences.


<i><b>a.Hoang gets up at...</b></i>
<i><b>b.He goes to school at...</b></i>
<i><b>c.No, he doesn t.</b></i>’


<i><b>e. his classes start at ...</b></i>
<i><b>f. The classes end at ...</b></i>


<i><b> - say about themselves in front of the </b></i>
<i>class.</i>


- Write the questions and answers in the
notebooks.


-Take notes and memorize


- Do homework as the teacher suggests.


Teaching date: .12.08

<b> UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT</b>



<b> Lesson 1/ 44: WHAT ARE YOU DOING? A1 - 3</b>


<b>A.Aim: : By the end of the lesson, students can express what is happening at the moment </b>


by using the present progressive positive staments with I / she / he .


<b>B.Teaching aids:</b>


Cassette and pictures
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking and writing .
<b>D. Procedures:</b>


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’


<b>1.Revision: - check the old lesson </b>
<b> plane</b>


bike
walk
train
car


motorbike


- ask the ss about how they go to


school.



How do you go to school?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

<b>2 . Presentation: </b>
<b> +Vocabulary:</b>



to ride a bike : Đạp xe
to drive : lái ô tô
to wait for :chờ , đợi
Travel: đi .


+ Checking vocabulary:


Rub out and remember


-Point to the Vietnamese translations and
rub out English words.


- Get students to call the English words.
<b>+Presentation text.</b>


- Set the scene: They are talking about
What they are doing.


- Ask students to listen to the text about the
town.


- Isolate the model sentences by answering
the questions and:


<b>+ Target language:</b>


<b> -A1 </b>–<i><b> Top three pictures (page 82)</b></i>
<i><b> + I am playing video games.</b></i>


+ He is playing video games.


<i> + I am riding a bike.</i>


<i> + She is riding a bike.</i>
<i> + I am driving a car.</i>
<i> + He is driving a car. </i>
<i><b> I am +V-ing</b></i>


He / she is + V-ing
<i><b> ®ang………</b></i>


<i><b> - diễn tả một hành động đang diễn ra</b></i>
<i>* Notes: - Ride </i>–<i>riding</i>


<i> - Drive - driving</i>
<b>3.Practice:</b>


<b>Picture drill</b>
- Run through the pictures.


- Hold up the first picture and say the
model sentences:


<i> +I m walking to school’</i>
<i> + She s waiting for a bus’</i>


- Do the same for the seccond picture.
- Correct their mistakes.


<b>4.Further practice:</b>



<b>Nought and crosses</b>
- Put the grid on the board.


<i>walk to</i>


<i>school</i> <i>drive a<sub>bus</sub></i> <i>travel by<sub>bus</sub></i>


<i>wait for a</i>


<i>train</i> <i>ride abike</i> <i>play agame</i>
<i>go by</i>


<i>plane</i> <i>drive acar</i>


<i>ride a</i>
<i>motorbik</i>


<i>e</i>


- Divide class into teams. One is noughts


- answer the question:
I go to school by ....


- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.
- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.
- Students repeat chorally and remember


all the English words.


- Call the English words and write the
English words if there is time.


- Listen to the teacher’s explanation.
- Read the statements.


- Answer the questions.


- Understand of the target language in
term of meaning, use and form by
answering the questions: + <i>He plays</i>
<i>video games.</i>


<i> + No.</i>
<i> + Yes.</i>


- Write the form in their notebooks.
<i><b> I am +V-ing</b></i>


He / she is + V-ing
<i><b> ®ang………</b></i>


<i><b> - diễn tả một hành động đang diễn ra</b></i>
<i>* Notes: - Ride </i>–<i>riding</i>


<i> - Drive - driving</i>


- Look at the pictures.


- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

(O) and the other is Crosses (X).


- Two teams choose any things in the boxes
and ask questions about what things are .
<b>5.Homework:</b>


Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary
and How to talk about actions happening
now.


<i>- I am +V-ing .”</i>


<i> - He / she + is +V-ing.</i>


- Unit 8: Out and About – Lesson 2
<i>WHAT ARE YOU DOING?</i>


- Look at the board.


- Work in groups.


- One is noughts (O) and the other is
Crosses (X).



- Choose any phrases in the boxes, ask
and ask questions about where they
live :


<i>+I’m walking to school.</i>
<i>+ I’m driving a bus.</i>


- Take notes and memorize


- Do homework as the teacher suggests.
Teacching date: .12.08

<b> UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT</b>



<i><b> Lesson 2/45</b></i><b> : A4-6</b>
<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use Present progressive with positive
statements with we / you / they to talk about actions happening now.


B. Teaching aids: Poster
<b>C.Methods:</b>


Practice speaking and writing
D.Procedures:


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>I.Revision:</b>



- gives some pictures and ask the ss to say
what the people in the pictures are doing ?
<b>II.Presentation picture.</b>


- Set the scene: We are talking about our
classmates.


- Get them to guess what are they doing.
- Point to the pictures and ask them to tell
what they are doing:


*Student1:He is riding a bike.


- look at the pictures and say :
she is reading ....


he is watching TV .
...
- Listen to the teacher


- Students guess what they are doing.
- Look at the pictures and tell what their
classmates are doing.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

* Teacher:What is he doing?
*Student2:She is driving a car.


- gives the model sentences :



<i>+ What is he doing?</i>


+ He is riding a bike.
<i> + What is she doing?.</i>
<i> + She is driving a car . </i>
<i> + What are they doing?.</i>


<i> + They are playing video games. </i>
<i> + What are you doing?</i>


<i> + I am studying English.</i>
<i><b> </b><b>- What is he / she doing?</b></i>


<b> -</b><i><b> He / She is + V.ing . </b></i>”


<i><b> - What are you / they doing? </b></i>
<i><b> - I am / They are + V. ing</b></i>”<i><b> . </b></i>


<i><b> </b></i>


- <i>đang làm g×- </i>


- <i>Hỏi một hành động đang diễn ra</i>
<i><b> III. Practice: </b></i>


<b>Picture drill</b>


-ask the ss to run through the pictures.
<b>- A6, page 84:</b>


<b> </b>

-

Hold up the first picture and say the
model sentences:


<i> +Who is that?</i>
<i> That is Mr..</i>
<i>What does he do?</i>
<i> He is a buisinessman.</i>
<i> Where is he going ?</i>
<i> Heis going to Hanoi.</i>
<i> How does he travel?</i>
<i> He travels by air. </i>


- Do the same for the seccond picture.
- Correct their mistakes.


<b>Answers given</b>


- Have students read all the three parts a,
b, and c.


<b>a) Mr. Ha is a businessman. He is going to </b>
Ha Noi.


<b>b) Miss Hoa is a teacher. She is going to </b>
schol.


<b>c) Mr. Tuan and Mrs. Vui are doctors. </b>
They are going to the hospital.


Ask them to make questions with question
words: Who, What, Where and How as in
the examples.



<b>5.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart Present
progressive “WH” question with He /she /
they.


- What is he / she doing?
- He / She is + V ing . <i>“</i> <i>”</i>
<i>- What are you / they doing? </i>
<i>- I am / They are + V ing“</i> <i>” </i>


- Exercies in the workbook from page 70
to 71.


- Repeat after the teacher’s question.
- Students isolate the model


<i>+ What is he doing?</i>
+ He is riding a bike.
<i> + What is she doing?.</i>
<i> + She is driving a car . </i>
<i> + What are they doing?.</i>


<i> + They are playing video games. </i>
<i> + What are you doing?</i>


<i> + I am studying English.</i>
<i>-copy the forms:</i>



<i><b>- What is he / she doing?</b></i>


<b> -</b><i><b> He / She is + V.ing . </b></i>”


<i><b> - What are you / they doing? </b></i>
<i><b> - I am / They are + V. ing</b></i>”<i><b> . </b></i>
<i><b> - </b>………đang làm gì?</i>


<i><b> - Hỏi một hành động đang diễn ra</b></i>


- run through the pictures
- Look at the pictures.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then in pairs.


Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front ( A6 P. 84 )
- Read all the three parts a, b, and c.


- Make questions with question words:
Who, What, Where and How as in the
examples.


- Ask questions.
- Work in pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

<i> </i>


<i>*T’s evaluation:</i>


<i> ...</i>
<i>...</i>
<i>...</i>
<i>...</i>


<i> </i>Teaching date: .12.08
UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT


<i> Lesson 3/46: B1 </i>–<b> B2</b>


A.Aim: Help students understand the main ideas and details by reading a story picture
about a truck driver.


B . Teaching aids:


Book ,textbook, Posters


C. Methods: practice reading the text and answer the question
D. Procedures:


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>I.Warmer:</b>


Slap the board game


-T gives some words about jobs, ask the ss to
play game



-T gives feedback
<b>II. Pre- reading:</b>
1.Vocabulary;


A truck driver: tµi xÕ xe tải
To load: bốc hàng lên


To unload:d hng xung
Arrive: đến


A food stall: quán ăn nhỏ ven đờng
-checking the vocabulary


Matching : words and pictures
2.set the scene:


- tell the ss they are going to read the text about
Mr Quang , what does he do in the morning?
- gives the ss 6 pictures about Mr Quang’s
activities:


a. Go to Hanoi


- work in groups


- listen to the T
- repeat the words
- copy the words


-work in groups : match the words


and the pictures


-listen to the T


-look at the pictures and run through
the meaning .


nurse worker


enginee
r


doctor


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

b. Meet the farmer
c. Have breakfast
d. Go to a farm


e. Load vegetables in the truck
f. Unload the truck


-ask the ss to work in groups: discuss the order
I think…. I read….


A 3 4
B 5 2
C 1 5
D 4 1
E 6 6
F 2 3


<b>III. while- reading :</b>


-ask the ss to read the text and check their
predictions.


-ask the ss to fill the column “I read ….”:
4-2-5-1-6-3


- comprehension questions( b1, p87, a-f)
a.


b.
c.
d.
e.
f.


<b>IV. Post reading :</b>


- ask the ss to retell what Mr quang do in the
morning:


<i><b>Mr Quang is a truck driver.he is going to a </b></i>
<i><b>farm. He is meeting the farmer. He and the </b></i>
<i><b>farmer are loading the vegetables in the </b></i>


<i><b>truck.He is driving to Hanoi and unloading the</b></i>
<i><b>vegetables at the maket.He is eating his </b></i>


<i><b>breakfast at 7 a.m .</b></i>


-call the ss to retell.


-gives feedback.


-Ask the ss to write up the sentences about Mr
Quang.


<b>V.Homework:</b>


- ask the ss to learn the vocab by heart.


- learn the form of the present continuos tense.
- Do ex b1 ,p73.ex B2,3 ,p74(w,book)


- work in groups and give the
order


- copy the order: 4-2-5-1-6-3


- read the text and check
- fill the column with the right


order


- answer the questions


- retell one by one picture
- <i><b>Mr Quang is a truck driver</b></i>
- <i><b>he is going to a farm.</b></i>
- <i><b>He is meeting the farmer</b></i>


- <i><b>He and the farmer are </b></i>


<i><b>loading the vegetables in the</b></i>
<i><b>truck.</b></i>


- <i><b>He is driving to Hanoi and </b></i>
<i><b>unloading the vegetables at </b></i>
<i><b>the maket.</b></i>


<i><b> - He is eating his breakfast at 7</b></i>
<i><b>a.m </b></i>


- good students retell the story
about Mr Quang.


-copy the T’s requests
T’s evaluation:


...
...
...
...


Teaching date: .12.08


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

Lesson 5: ROAD SIGNS -C1-2
<i> </i>


A.Aim: Help students know the usage of “can / can’t” statements and traffic vocabulary.
B. Teaching aids: Poster and pictuers



<b>C.Methods:</b>


Practice speaking
D. Procedures:


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>.Revision: </b>


<i><b> Lan </b></i>

<i><b> Ba  </b></i>


-What/you/do ?
-you/do/math ?
-you/copy/Na.?
What/Tuan/do?
-Nga &


Huong/
work?


do/homework.
Yes


No


play soccer
No


<b>2 .Presentation: </b>


<b> +Vocabulary:</b>


- a policeman : công an ,cấnh sát.
- difficul : khó khăn


- a sign : biển b¸o


- one-way :đờng một chiều.
- to park : đỗ xe


- turn letf / right :rẽ trái / phải.
- go straight : đi th¼ng


+ Checking vocabulary:
<b>Presentation text.</b>


- Set the scene: You are going to read a text
about Hoan.


- Ask students to read the text and answer
the questions.


<i>+ What does Hoan do?</i>
+ Is his job difficul?


<i> + What does this sign mean?</i>
<i> + What does this sign mean? </i>
<i> - You can park here.</i>


<i> - You can t</i>’ <i> park here.</i>


<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> You can / can t + V</b></i>’


Isolate the model sentences by pointing to
the signs:


-“You can park here”
<i> -“You can t park here’</i> <i>”</i>


- Ask them to write the form in their
notebooks.


<b>3. Practice: A3, page 74</b>
<b> Picture drill</b>


- Run through the pictures
a) turn left
b) turn right
c) park here


d) ride a motorbike
e) park here


- Look at the board and listen to the
teacher.


- Repeat after the teacher.
- Practice the dialogue in pair .
- Some pairs practice in front.


- Rewrite the dialogue .


- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.
- Students repeat chorally and remember
all the English words.


- Call the English words and write the
English words if there is time.


- Listen to the teacher’s explanation.
- Read the statements.


- Answer the questions.


- Understand of the target language in
term of meaning, use and form by
pointing to the signs.


- Write the form in their notebooks.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>

-Hold up the first picture and say the model
sentences:


<i> +Can you turn left ? </i>
<i> + No.</i>



<i> You can t turn left. ’</i>


- Do the same for the seccond picture.
- Correct their mistakes.


<b>4.Further practice: - C2, page 89,90:</b>
<b>Write it up</b>


- Let students look at the signs and complete
the sentences with “can ” or “<i><b>can t </b></i>’ ” and
write in the notebook.


a) You ……… turn left.
b) You ……… turn right.<b> </b>
c) You ……… go ahead.


d) You ……… ride a motorbike.
5.Homework


- Ask students to learn by heart traffic
vocabulary and can / can’t statements.


- Have them prepare the next lesson:
Unit 8 - Lesson 6:(C3 –<i> C4)</i>:
Must / musn’t statements.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.


- Make the sentence for themselves.


- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.


-Look at the signs.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Complete the sentences with “can ” or
<i><b>can t </b></i>


“ ’ ” and write in the notebook.


-Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests




Teaching date: .12.08


<b> UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT</b>



<i> Lesson 5/48: ROAD SIGNS (C3-C4)</i>
<b>AAim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “Must / musn’t” for obligation or
prohibition.


B.Teaching aids: Poster and cassette.
<b>C.Methods:</b>



Practice speaking
<b>D. Procedures:</b>


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>I. Revision:</b>


Word Square


<b>R</b> <b>O</b> <b>A</b> <b>D</b> <b>S</b> <b>I</b> <b>G</b> <b>N</b> <b>D</b>


<b>W</b> <b>K</b> <b>O</b> <b>R</b> <b>X</b> <b>H</b> <b>I</b> <b>S</b> <b>A</b>


<b>A</b> <b>C</b> <b>C</b> <b>I</b> <b>D</b> <b>E</b> <b>N</b> <b>T</b> <b>N</b>


<b>R</b> <b>U</b> <b>C</b> <b>D</b> <b>R</b> <b>L</b> <b>O</b> <b>R</b> <b>G</b>


<b>N</b> <b>R</b> <b>A</b> <b>E</b> <b>I</b> <b>P</b> <b>T</b> <b>A</b> <b>E</b>


<b>S</b> <b>T</b> <b>R</b> <b>A</b> <b>V</b> <b>E</b> <b>L</b> <b>I</b> <b>R</b>


<b>T</b> <b>U</b> <b>S</b> <b>L</b> <b>E</b> <b>F</b> <b>T</b> <b>G</b> <b>O</b>


<b>O</b> <b>R</b> <b>I</b> <b>G</b> <b>H</b> <b>T</b> <b>O</b> <b>H</b> <b>U</b>


<b>P</b> <b>N</b> <b>G</b> <b>O</b> <b>F</b> <b>A</b> <b>S</b> <b>T</b> <b>S</b>


<b> : road sign , travel, left, right……</b>


- Look at the word of the square on the
board.



- Listen to the teacher and answer the
teacher questions.


+ There are 19 hidden workds


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

<i> : stop, turn, car, ride, go, drive, stra..</i>
: truck


<b>II.Pre - reading: </b>
<b> +Vocabulary:</b>


<b> - dangerous (adj) : nguy hiẻm</b>
- an accident : tai nạn


- an intersection : giaolộ
- to slow down :giảm tốc độ.
- to go fast :đi nhanh , tăngtốc.
- to warn us : cảnh báo chúng ta
- to help us :giúp chúng ta.
Checking vocabulary:


Slap the board


-PuttheVietnamesetranslationonthe


-Call two students of two teams to the front
of the class.


<b>Pre </b>–<b> questions</b>



- Give students two questions and ask them
to discuss with their partners to predict the
answers.


1) What must we do when there is a
intersection ahead?


2) What musn’t we do when the sign says
“Stop”?


<b>III. While reading</b>


Ask students to read the text on page 90
and check their predictions.


- Mention the verb “must” and “musn’t”.
1) We must slow down.


2) We musn’t go straight ahead.
Form:


Must / musn t + V
<i> - phải/ không phải...</i>
<i> </i>


<i> - diễn tả sự bắt buộc , nghiêm cÊm</i>


- Get students to work in pairs to answer
the questions about the signs :



+What must we do ?
<i> + What musn t we do’</i>
<b>IV.Post reading: C4 , page 91 </b>


<b>Ordering pictures</b>


- Ask students to look at the pictures in C4
on page 91.


<b>V.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart
vocabulary and “Can (not) / must (not)” .
- Have them do some exercies in the


- Put the word into a present progressive
statement and write it on the board.


-Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.


<b>Group works.</b>


- Say the Vietnamese translation .



- Run forward and slap the correct words
on the board.


- Continue until students have slapped all
the words


- Read the two questions and discuss with
their partners to predict the answers.


- Read the text and check their
predictions.


- Take notes and memorize


- Try to ask more questions about road
signs to make sure that everybody in class
understand what to do when seeing the
road signs


- Look at the road signs on page 91, listen
to the tape and order the pictures.


Cảnh báo
Giảm tốc độ


Dừng lại
Giúp đỡ


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

workbook:



from page 73 to 74


- prepare Unit 8 - Lesson 7: GRAMMAR
<i>PRACTICE </i>


<i> (Lesson1 </i>–<i> 6</i>


- Take notes and memorize


- Do homework as the teacher requested.


T’s evaluation

:



...


...


...



Teaching date: .12.08

<b> UNIT 8: out AND ABOUT</b>



Lesson 6/49: GRAMMAR PRACTICE
<i> </i>


A.Aim:


Further practice in the grammar points: simple present, present progressive, prepositions
and question words.


B.Teaching aids: Textbook
<b>C.Methods : </b>



Practice speaking and wrtiting
<b>D. Procedures:</b>


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1.Revision: </b>


<b>Bingo</b>
- Put the table on the board.


Wait, turn left, load, walk, travel, train,
<i>car, turn right, get, go straight, must, warn,</i>
<i>intersection, stop, bike</i>


-Ask students to choose any five words
and copy them into their books.


- Let students listen to the teacher.
<b>2.Presentation:</b>


<b> *Present progressive with I, he, she:</b>
-S1: I m watching TV.<i>’</i>


<i> - S2: She s watching TV and I m playing ’</i> <i>’</i>
<i>video games</i>


<i><b>*</b></i>Present progressive with all person:


<b>1 2 3 4 5 6 </b>
<b>7</b>



<b>1. c)</b><i>is / watching 6.<b>Lucky number</b></i>


<b>2. a)</b><i>is / riding </i><b>7. e) is /listening</b>
<b> 3.</b> <i><b>Lucky number </b></i><b> 8.</b><i><b>Lucky number</b></i>


<b>4. d)</b><i>are / playing</i> <b>9.g) is / going</b>


<b>5. b)</b><i>are / witing</i>


<b>Lucky numbers</b>


- Write the numbers on the board.


- Divide class into teams. The teams take


-Look at the board.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Choose any five words.


- Put ticks next to the words that they listen
to.


- Shouts “Bingo”.


- Look at the board.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

turn to choose the numbers.


- Tell students that they have to answer


the questions .


<i><b>Preposition of place (3) :</b></i>


<b>Matching</b>


<i><b> A B</b></i>


<b>1</b>.A girl is ... a. to the left of


<b>2</b>.A boy is waiting b. in


<b>3</b>…… mountains …… c. to the right of


<b>4</b>.some house……… d. in front of


<b>5</b>…… some trees…… e. opposite


<b>6</b>……… atruck……… f.


Ask students to match the item in column
A with the item in column B .


- Ask students to work in teams.


- Ask them to do the exercise 3 in the
notebooks.


<i><b>Question words (4) :</b></i>



<b>Answer given</b>


- Show students the statements


<b> a.</b> She is going to the store.
<b>b.</b> Nga is waiting for Lan.
<b>c.</b> She is carrying a bag.
<b>d.</b> It is twelve o’clock.
Let students ask questions.
- Ask them to work in pairs


-Correct if there are any mistakes
* <i><b>Must and mustn’t – Can and can’t :</b></i>


<b>Nought and crosses</b>


- Put the grid on the board.


<b>a</b>


<b>STOP</b> <b>b</b> <b>c</b>


<b>h</b> <b>i</b>


<b>20 Km</b>


<b>d</b>


<b>g</b>
<b>P</b>



<b>f</b> <b><sub>e</sub></b>


- Divide class into teams. One is noughts


- Take turn to choose the numbers.


- Answer the questions by looking at the
picture.


<b>Group work</b>


- Some read aloud as the teacher asks.
- Do the exercise, then read aloud.
- Work in teams.


- Do the exercise 3 in the notebooks.


- Look at the board.
- Read the statements.
- Ask questions.


- Work in pairs.


- Look at the board.


- Work in groups.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

(O) and the other is Crosses (X).



- Two teams choose any things in the
boxes and ask questions about what things
are .


- The team which has three noughts or
three crosses on a line will win the game.


<b>3.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to review vocabulary and
Grammar points (Unit1 – Unit8) and
exercises in the exercise book from Unit
1 to Unit 8 .


- Have them prepare <i>REVISION</i>.


Crosses (X).


- Choose any phrases in the boxes, ask
and ask questions about where they live :


<i>+ What does Sign <b>“i” </b>mean?</i>
<i>+ You must slow down</i>


- Review vocabulary and Grammar
points (Unit1 – Unit8) and exercises in
the exercise book from Unit 1 to Unit 8 .


- - Prepare <i>REVISION</i>.



<b> </b>

Teaching date: .1 .08


<b> Lesson 50: REVISION</b>



<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use grammar points and
vocabulary better.


B<b>. Teaching aids</b>: Pictures


<b>C.Methods:</b>


Practice speaking and writing


<b>D. Procedures</b>:


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’


<b>1.Revision: </b>


<b>* </b><i><b>Qusetion words :</b></i>


<b>Answer given</b>


- Show students the statements


<b>a.</b> She is Lan. <b>b.</b>She is eleven.



<b>c.</b> She is a students. <b>d.</b>She is in grade 6.


<b>e. </b>She lives in Ho Chi Minh City.


<b>f.</b> There are forty students in her class
- Let students ask questions.


- Ask them to work in pairs


-Correct if there are any mistakes


<b>2.Presentation and Further practice:</b>


- Look at the board.
- Read the statements.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

<b> * </b><i><b>To be: Is / am / are</b></i>


<b>Gap fill</b>


- Get students to fill in the blank with
the correct form of the verbs in brackets :


<i><b>Present simple (To be) : Is / am / are</b></i>


<b> I </b><i><b>am</b> Nam and this <b>is</b> Lan. She <b>is</b> my </i>
<i>friend. We <b>are</b> in the yard. My parents <b>are</b></i>


<i>in the house.</i>



<b>* </b><i><b>Numbers : 1 – 100</b></i>


<b>Slap the board</b>


- Put the numbers on the board.


<b> </b> <b> </b>


<i><b>11 </b></i>


<i><b>30</b></i>


<i><b>80</b></i>


<i><b>100</b></i>


<i><b>55</b></i>


-Call two students of two teams to the
front of the class.


- Call out one of English words in loud
voice.


<i><b>* How old………?</b></i>


<b>Word cue drill</b>


- Run through the cues.



<b> a. </b>you / 11
<b>b.</b> He / 45


<b> c.</b> She / 20
<b>d.</b> Nam / 15


<b>e.</b> Your father / 42
<b>f. </b>Your mother / 40


- Hold up the first cues and say the model
sentences.


<i>- How old are you ? </i>
<i>-</i> <i>I am eleven years old.</i>


- Correct their mistakes.


<i><b>* How many……… ?</b></i><b>: A2, page 31</b>


<b>Picture drill</b>


- Run through the pictures
<b>a)</b> 1 clock
<b>b)</b> 3 stools


Fill in the blank with the correct form of
the verbs in brackets : <i><b>Present simple (To</b></i>
<i><b>be) : Is / am / are.</b></i>



<b>Group works.</b>


- Say the numbers in Vietnamese .


- Run forward and slap the correct
numbers on the board.


- Continue until students have slapped all
the numbers.


- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

<b>c)</b> 1 TV
<b>d)</b> 8 books


<b>e)</b> 1 table


<b>f)</b> 2 armchairs


Hold up the first picture and say the
model sentences:


<i> +How many clocks are there? </i>
<i> +There is one. </i>



- Do the same for the seccond picture.
- Correct their mistakes.


<i><b>* Question word : </b></i>


<b> </b><i><b> What does he / she do ?</b></i>
<i><b> He / she is a ………</b></i>


<b>a)</b> teacher


<b>b)</b> nurse


<b>c)</b> engineer
d )student


<b>Guessing game.</b>


- Show them the pictures. Ask them to
choose one of the jobs.


<b>3.Further practice:</b>


<b>Mapped dialogue</b>


- Put the dialogue on the board which is
only words. The words are cues.


<i><b> Mai </b></i>

<i><b> Nam</b></i> 
Who / that ?


How old ………
?


she/ live/
Hue?


Where /
live?


What / do ?


Nga.
12.
No.
Ha Noi
student.


Model the dialogue.


- Run through the cues like a drill with
the whole class.


<b>3.Homework:</b>


Ask students to review vocabulary and


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.



- Some pairs practice in front.


- Students look at the pictures and choose
one of the houses the teacher shows


-Look at the board and listen to the
teacher.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

Grammar points (Unit1 – Unit8) and
exercises in the exercise book from Unit
1 to Unit 8 .


Review vocabulary and Grammar points
(Unit1 – Unit8) and exercises in the
exercise book from Unit 1 to Unit 8 .
 T’s evaluation

:



...


...


...



Teaching date: .1 .08


<b> Lesson 51: REVISION</b>



<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim</b>:



By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use grammar points and
vocabulary better and then do a test (in 2007.)


B<b>. Teaching aids</b>:


<b>C.Methods:</b>


Practice speaking ( call the ss to say their answers) and writing


<b>D. Procedures</b>:


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Give questions :</b>


Câu 1: Chọn đáp án đúng trong ngoặc để
hoàn thành câu:


1. Tam ( am /is/are) my sister.
2. My brother is fourteen. ( he /


her/his ) name is Anh.


3. What ( do/does/is ) Mr Long do?
4. Hanh (go/goes / is going ) to school


everyday.


5. Ms Nga is a teacher . She teaches in
a (farm / school / hospital).



6. How/What /Where ) do you live ? I
live in Vinh city.


7. He has Math and English ( on/in /at )
Monday.


8. I ( read /listen / watch ) Tv in the
evening.


9. Is there a river near your house?
( yes, there is/ yes ,She is/ yes, it is ).
10.She is in (class / grade) 9.


Câu 2: Sắp xếp các từ xáo trộn thành câu
đúng:


1.now/Lan /reading /is
2. where/ live /you /do ?


3. country / is /school /Lien’s/the /in /?
4. not /brother /my/ is/ a/ driver


5. get/ what /Nga/ up / time/ does/?


- read the questions and work in
groups to find the answers :
1. is


2. his
3. does


4. goes
5. school
6. where
7. on
8. watch
9. yes, thereis
10.grade


Key:


1. Lan is reading now.
2. where do you live ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

Câu3: Viết các từ sau bằng tiếng Anh:
1. môn lịch sử


2. sõn vn ng
3. in thoi
4. đối diện
5. vờn hoa


Câu 4: đọc đoạn văn sau rồi trả lời câu hỏi:
My name is thao Nguyen. I am in class 6D
at Nguyen Du school.I go to school at 6.15
and go home at 11 o’clock.


I do my homework and then read books
after school.I live with my mother and my
father in a beautiful house in the



cuountry.There are many tall trees aroud
the house.There is a mountain behind the
house. To the right of the house , there is a
well. There is a yard in front of the house.
There are a lot of flowers in the yard.
There is a vegetable garden to the left of
the house. There si a small river near the
house.


Questions:


1. What grade is Thao Nguyen in?
2. What does she do after school?
3. Is her house in the city?


4. Is there a well in front of the house?
5. What is there near the house?


<b>2. Corection:</b>
<b>3. Homework:</b>


Key:


1. History
2. stadium
3. telephone
4. opposite


5. flowers garden



- listen to the T’s giude to answer and
then give the answers:


1. she is in grade 6.


2. she does her homework and reads
books .


3. No, it is not.
4. yes, there is


5. there is a small river.


Teaching date: .1 .08


<b> Lesson 52: REVISION</b>



<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students continue using grammar points and vocabulary
better and then do a test ( 2007 - 2008.)


B<b>. Teaching aids</b>:


<b>C.Methods:</b>


Practice speaking ( call the ss to say their answers) and writing



<b>D. Procedures</b>:


1. Give the questions:


<i><b>I. LISTENING:</b></i>


<i><b>Listen and write True or False:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

___ 4. She does her homework in the evening.
___ 3. She goes to bed at nine.


<i><b>II. GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY: </b></i>
<i><b>Circle the best options:</b></i>


1. I am Lan. This ______ Nga.


a. am b. is c. are


2. ______ grade are you in? I’m in grade 6


a. Which b. Where c. Who


3. How are you? I’m ______ . Thank you.


a. five b. fine c. twelve


4. Tam lives ______ Tran Hung Dao street.


a. at b. in c. on



5. Does Nam live in a house? Yes, ______ .


a. I do b. he does c. she does


<i><b>III. READING: </b></i>


<i><b>Read the passage below then do the exercises:</b></i>


I am Nam. I am twelve years old. I live in a house in the city. Near my house there is
a restaurant, and a bank. Every afternoon, I go to school at twelve-thirty. I go to school
by bike. I like sports. I usually play soccer with my friends.


<i><b>1.</b><b>Write True or False:</b></i>


___ a. Nam goes to school in the afternoon.
___ b. Nam is eleven years old.


___ c. Near his house there is a hotel.


<i><b>2. Answer the questions:</b></i>


a. How does he go to school?
b. Does he like sports?


<i><b>IV. WRITING:</b></i>


<i><b>Read the letter from Lan to Hoa:</b></i>


<i>Dear Hoa,</i>



<i>This is my house. It is in the country and It’s small. In front of the house, there is a yard. </i>
<i>To the right of the house, there are trees. To the left of the house, there is a well. </i>


<i>There is a vegetable garden behind the house. Behind the vegetable garden, there is a </i>
<i>river. Near my house, there is a stadium.</i>


<i>Write soon</i>
<i> Lan</i>


<i><b>Now write a letter from Lan to Hoa, using the given words: </b>city, big, flower garden, </i>
<i>Flowers, lake, tall tres, hotel.</i>


<i> </i>


<b> </b> <i>Dear Lan,</i>


<i>This is my house. It is in the city and </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

<i>...</i>
<i>...</i>
<i>...</i>


2. Correction:


- call the ss to do the exercises
- correct if necessary


- Ask the ss to copy the answers in their notebooks.
3. Home work:



- revise the vocab and grammar points from unit 1 to unit 8 for the next exam.


<b>Lesson 53: First term test</b>



( theo đề chung của phòng )



Teaching date: .01.09


<i> </i> UNIT 9:

<b>THE BODY</b>



<i> Lesson 1/55: PARTS OF BODY (A1 </i>–<b> A2)</b>
<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about parts of body.
<b>B. Teaching aids: Poster and pictures</b>


<b>C.Methods:</b>


Practice speaking , play games
<b>D. Procedures:</b>


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Revision:</b>


<b>Chatting</b>


- Ask students some questions about them.
- Teacher – whole class.



<b> - Which class are you in?</b>
- Where do you live?


- Is there a rice paddy near your house?
play the game : slap the board


-Answer the teacher’s questions about
themselves.


- Students – Teacher.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

- ask the ss to read the words
- tell the ss these are the verbs that


relate the parts of the body.
<b>2 .Presentation: </b>


<b> +Vocabulary:</b>


Use the picture to introduce parts of the
body.


- a head : đầu
- a leg : chan
- a hand : bµn tay
- a chest : ngùc
- a shoulder(s) : vai.
- a finger : ngãn tay.
- a foot : bàn chân



<b>Rub out and remember</b>


-Point to the Vietnamese translations and
rub out English words.


- Get students to call the English words.
<b>3. Practice: A1 (page 96)</b>


<b>Picture drill</b>
- Run through the pictures.


a) a head e) a finger


b) hand f) a foot
c) shoulders g) a leg


d) chest


-Hold up the first picture and say the model
sentences:


<i>+What s that? / What are those?.’</i>
<i>+ That is a head .</i>


<i>+ Those are shoulders . </i>
<b>4.Further practice:</b>



<b>Nought and crosses</b>
<b>- Put the grid on the board</b>


<i><b>chest</b></i> <i><b>hands</b></i> <i><b>foot</b></i>


<i><b>fingers</b></i> <i><b>leg</b></i> <i><b>toes</b></i>


- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.


- Students repeat chorally and remember all
the English words.


- Call the English words and write the
English words if there is time.


- Look at the pictures.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in


- Look at the board.


- Work in groups.


- One is noughts (O) and the other is
Crosses (X).


- Choose any phrases in the boxes, ask and
ask questions about where they live :


<i>+What s that?/What are those?’</i>
<i>+ That is his head .</i>


<i>+ Those are his shoulders .</i>


<i>- practice the song as the T s guide’</i>


go see


Sit down stand


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

<i><b>arm</b></i> <i><b>head</b></i> <i><b>shoulder</b><b><sub>s</sub></b></i>
- practice the song :


I have one nose
two hands


clap your hands
I have two hands
clap your hands.
<b>5.Homework</b>



Ask students to learn by heart parts of the
body and how to talk about them.


- Have them prepare Unit 9 - Lesson 2:
Adjectives to describe physical appearance.


Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher requests.


 T’s evaluation :


...
...
...
Teaching date: .01.09

<b> UNIT 9: </b>

<b>THE BODY</b>



<b> Lesson 2/56: PARTS OF BODY (A3 </b>–<b> A5)</b>
<i><b>A. Aim: </b></i>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know how to describe the form of a
person.


<b>B. Teaching aids: Poster and cassette</b>
<b>C.Methods:</b>


Practice describing the people
D. Procedures:


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’


<b>I. Warm up: Shark s attack</b>’


- Divide the class into two teams.

<b> </b>

<b> </b>







C H E S T


- Shoulders feet legs
- fingers arm chest


- Ask each team for a letter in the alphabet.
- Ask students from each team to guess the
word.


<b>II. Presentation:</b>
<b> +Vocabulary:</b>
- short (adj) : thÊp
- tall (adj) : cao.


- Work in teams.
-Look at the board.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Give a letter in the alphabet.
- try to guess the word.



- Find out the word.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

- thin(adj) : gÇy
- fat (adj) :mËp , bÐo.
- heavy (adj) : nỈng
- light (adj) : nhĐ
+ Checking vocab.
slap the board


<b>+Dialogue build.</b>
- Set the scene.


- Read the dialogue and write few key
words on the board to help students
remember what the two speakers in the
dialogue say to each other .


- Get students to isolate the model
sentence.


<b>+ Target language: A6(page 99)</b>


<i><b>Nam: </b></i> Who is that ?


<i><b>Lien: </b></i>That’s Chi .


<i><b>Nam: </b>What does she do ? </i>


<i><b>Lien:</b></i> She’s a gymnast.



<i><b>Ba:</b></i> Is she short?


<i><b>Lan:</b></i> No, she isn’t. <b>She s </b>’ <i><b>tall</b></i>


<i><b> S + be + adjective </b></i>


- Adjective (adj): short, tall, thin, fat,
<i>heavy, light, strong, weak, </i>


<i><b> - miêu tả hình dáng</b></i>
<b>III. Practice:</b>


<b>Word cue drill</b>


- Run through the cues.


- She / short - They / light


- He / fat - We / heavy


- Nam / thin - Mai and Lan / tall
- Hold up the first cues and say the model
sentences.


<i>- What does she / he look like ? </i>
<i>- She is short .</i>


<i>- He is fat.</i>



<b>IV. Further practice: - A4, page 98</b>
<b>Predict Grid</b>


- Set the scene: You are going to listen to
about the forms of persons in the pictures .


<i><b>Picture</b></i> <i><b>tall / short /</b><b><sub>fat / thin</sub></b></i> <i><b>Listen</b></i>


<i><b>a</b></i> <i>thin, tall</i> <i><b>(4)</b></i>


- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.


<b>Group works.</b>
- Say the Vietnamese translation .


- Run forward and slap the correct words on
the board.


- Answer the teacher’s question.


- Look at the board and listen to the teacher
carefully.


- Reproduce the dialogue from the cues.
- Build the dialogue until it is memorized.
- Write in the missing words on the board.



- copy the notes


<i><b> S + be + adjective </b></i>


- Adjective (adj): short, tall, thin, fat,
<i>heavy, light, strong, weak, </i>


<i><b> - miêu tả hình dáng</b></i>
- Look at the cues.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.


- Listen to the teacher.


- Pay attention to the teacher’s explanation.
- Students copy the table.


Thấp Gầy


Nặng nhẹ


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

<i><b>b</b></i> <i>short, fat</i> <i><b>(3)</b></i>


<i><b>c</b></i> <i>tall, fat</i> <i><b>(2)</b></i>



<i><b>d</b></i> <i>short, fat</i> <i><b>(1)</b></i>


- Get students to guess about the forms of
persons in the pictures.


<b>V.Homework</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart
adjectives and How to decribe physical
appearance.


- Have them prepare Unit 9 - Lesson 3:
(B1): Face vocabulary to describe faces.


- Guess about the forms of persons in the
pictures.


-Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests.


 T’s evaluation :


...
...
...

<b> Teaching date: .01.09</b>


<b> UNIT 9: THE BODY</b>


<i> Lesson 3/57: FACES (B1)</i>


<i> </i>


A. Aim:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know how to describe faces.
B. Teaching aids: Pictures and poster


<b>C.Methods;</b>


Practice speaking
<b>D. Procedures:</b>


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1.Revision:</b>


<b>Nought and crosses</b>
<b>- Put the grid on the board</b>


<i><b>short</b></i> <i><b>light</b></i> <i><b>strong</b></i>


<i><b>fat</b></i> <i><b>tall</b></i> <i><b>lovely</b></i>


<i><b>thin</b></i> <i><b>heavy</b></i> <i><b>weak</b></i>


-Divide class into teams and play the game
<b>2 .Presentation: </b>


<b> +Vocabulary:</b>
- a face :khuôn mặt
. -Long (adj) : dài


- hair (unc) : tãc
- an ear : tai.
- lips : môi


- a tooth (teeth) : răng
- a mouth : miệng
- a nose : mịi
- a an eye : m¾t
- Round (adj) : trßn


- Oval (adj) :hình trái xoan.
- Full (adj) : đầy đặn


+ checking vocab.
What and where


- Look at the board.
- Work in groups.


- Look at the picture drawn on the board.
- Pay attention to each part of the face as
the teacher introduces


- Repeat the new words and look at the
points the teacher shows.


- Notice the meaning of the adjectives.
- Write the new words in their notebooks.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

- Elicit the vocabulary from the students


and write them in the circles.


- Get students to repeat the words including
the rubbed out words by pointing at the
empty circle.


<b>+Presentation text.</b>


- Ask students to read the phrases in the
pictures and answer the questions :


+ What does he/she look like?
<i> + He has a round face.</i>


<i> + She has an oval face.</i>


- Isolate the model sentences by
underlining the model sentence.


<b>+ Target language : A6(page 99)</b>
<i> - He has a round face.</i>


<i> - She has an oval face.</i>


<i> - She has full lips.</i>
<i> - He has thin lips.</i>
<i> - She has long hair.</i>
<i> - He has short hair. </i>
<i><b> Adjective + Noun </b></i>
<i><b> -has : cã</b></i>



<i><b> -miêu tả đặc điểm , dáng vóc.</b></i>


- Ask them to write the form in their
notebooks


<b>3. Practice: B1 (page 100)</b>
<b>Picture drill</b>


- Run through the pictures.


a) a round face d) thin lips


b) an oval face f) long hair
c) full lips g) short hair


- Hold up the first picture and say the
model sentences:


<i>+He has a round face </i>


- Do the same for the seccond picture.
<b>4.Further practice:</b>


<b>- gives some pictures ,asks the ss to </b>
describe them


<b>5.Homework</b>



<i>- Ask students to learn by heart Face</i>
vocabulary and How to decribe faces.
- Have them prepare Unit 9 - Lesson 3:
(B2-3): Adjectives of colour to describe
features.


- Go to the board and fill in the circles with
the right words.


- Listen to the teacher’s explanation.
- Read the statements.


- Answer the questions.


- Understand of the target language in term
of meaning, use and form by pointing to
the signs.


- Write the form in their notebooks.
<i><b> Adjective + Noun </b></i>


<i><b> -has : cã</b></i>


<i><b> -miêu tả đặc điểm , dáng vóc.</b></i>


- Look at the pictures.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.


- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.
- describe the people


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests.
 T’s evaluation :


...
...
...
Teaching date: .01.09
<b> UNIT 9: THE BODY</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

A. Aim:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know how to describe the main
colors of hair or skin.


B. Teaching aids: Pictures and poster
<b>C.Methods;</b>


Practice speaking
<b>D. Procedures:</b>


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Revision: </b>


<b>Jumbled words</b>



-Write numbers whose letters are in
disorder.


<b> - yees = eyes</b>
- hari = hair
- cefa = face
- spli = lips
- sone = nose


- dreshouls = shoulders
-Divide the class into two teams.


- Ask students from each team to go to the
board and write the correct words .


<b>2 .Presentation: </b>
<b> +Vocabulary:</b>


Use a chart of colors to show and tell the
name of each color.


- black (adj) : mµu ®en.
- yellow (adj) : mµu vµng
- white (adj) : màu trắng
- green (adj) : mµu xanh lôc.
- gray (adj) : màu xám.


- blue (adj) : màu xanh dơng.
- red (adj) : màu đỏ.



- brown (adj) : mµu n©u.
- orange (adj) : mµu da cam
- purple (adj) : mµu tÝm
<b>+Checking vocabulary</b>


<b>Real things</b>


- Show things around and ask students to
say the names of the color


<b>Rub out & remember dialogue</b>
- Set the scene: Lan is asking Nga about her
doll.


- Put the dialogue on the board .
- Rub out some of the words .
<b>Target language: </b>


Nga: I have a new doll.


<i><b>Lan: What color is her hair?.</b></i>
<i><b>Nga: It s black.</b></i>’


<i><b>Lan: What color are her eyes?</b></i>
<i><b>Nga: They are brown.</b></i>


-What color + is / are + S ?
<i><b> - It is + Color </b></i>



<i><b> - They are + Color.</b></i>
<i><b>- dùng đẻ hỏi về màu sắc</b></i>


- Get students to isolate the model
sentence.


- Ask students some questions :


- Look at the board.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Work in teams.


- Go to the board and write the correct
words. (One word, one student)


- Look at the chart of colors and listen to
the teacher.


- Repeat the new words and look at the
points the teacher shows.


- Retell the names of colors.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.
- Try to say the colors as the teacher asks. -
- Say as many colors as possible


- Practice saying the dialogue.



- Remember the rubbed out words and keep
practicing it.


- Repeat the rubbed out dialogue from
memory.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

+ What color is her hair ?
<i> + What color are her eyes ?</i>
<b>3. Practice: B1 (page 100)</b>


<b>Picture drill</b>
- Run through the pictures.


. hair / green / eyes / yellow
. hair / brown / eyes / green
. hair / red / eyes / black


- Hold up the first picture and say the
model sentences:


<i> +What color is his hair ?</i>
<i> + It s green. </i>’


-Do the same for the seccond picture.
<b>4. Further practice:</b>


<b>Guessing game.</b>


- Show them the pictures



<i>* Does he / she have a black hair?</i>
* Yes, he / she does.


<i> * No, he/ she doesn t.</i>’
<b>5.Homework</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart adjectives of
color to describe features.


- Have them prepare Unit 9 - Lesson 4:(<i>B4-6)</i>:
Further practice in Body vocabulary to describe
people.


+ They are brown


- Copy the notes and memorize.


- Look at the pictures.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.
- answer the questions.


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests.



Teaching date: .01.09


<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 9: THE BODY</b>


<i><b> </b></i><b> Lesson 5/59: FACES (B4 </b>–<b> B5)</b>


<i><b> </b></i>


A. Aim:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use Body vocabulary to describe
people by reading the text.


B. Teaching aids: Pictures and Castette
<b>C.Methods;</b>


Practice speaking
<b>D. Procedures:</b>


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Revision:</b>


<b> B6 </b>–<b> page 102</b>


<b>Listen</b>


- Let students listen to the song “ Head and
Shoulders, Knees and Toes”


- Have them sing the song again.


<b>2. Pre reading:</b>


<b>Open prediction</b>


- Set the scene: You are going to read
about Miss Chi. Guess how Miss Chi’s
appearance.


<b> Miss Chi is (1) ____________ and </b>
<i>thin. She has a (2) ____________ face,</i>
<b>(3) ________ black hair, (4) ________</b>
<i>eyes, a (5) ___________ nose, (6) ____</i>
________ lips and small (7) _________
teeth .


- Point to the missing passage and ask: +
How is Miss Chi / her face / hair / eyes /
nose / lips/… ?


- Ask students to write three things in their


Listen to the song “ Head and Shoulders,
Knees and Toes”.


- Some sing the song again.


- Listen to the teacher and answer the
questions:


- Students to write Miss Chi’s appearance


in their books :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

books


<b>3. While reading</b>


- Ask students to read the text on page 101
and check their predictions.


- Get students to answer the questions
about Miss Chi :


<b>1) tall 4) brown 7) white </b>
2) round 5) small


3) long 6) thin


<b>Lucky numbers</b>


- Write the numbers on the board.
<b>Reading comprehension</b>
<b>1 2 3 4 5 6</b>
<b>7 </b>


- Divide class into teams. The teams take
turn to choose the numbers.


- Tell students that they have to answer the
questions .



<b>1 b) What color is her hair?</b>
<b>2 Lucky number. </b>


<b>3 d) Is her nose big or small? </b>
<b>4 e) Are her lips full or thin?</b>


<b>5 Lucky number. </b>


<b>6 a) Is Miss Chi’s hair long or short?</b>
<b>7 c) What color are her eyes</b>


<b>4.Post reading: B5 , page 102 </b>
<b>Ordering pictures</b>


- Ask students to look at the pictures in B5
on page 102.


<i><b>No</b></i> <i><b>hair</b></i> <i><b>face</b></i> <i><b>nose</b></i> <i><b>lips</b></i>


<i><b>1</b></i> <i>short</i> <i>round</i> <i>big</i> <i>Full</i>


<i><b>2</b></i> <i>short</i> <i>oval</i> <i>small</i> <i>Thin</i>


<i><b>3</b></i> <i>long</i> <i>oval</i> <i>big</i> <i>Thin</i>


<i><b>4</b></i> <i>long</i> <i>round</i> <i>small</i> <i>full</i>
- Let students listen to the cassette and put
the pictures in correct order by numbering
them.



<b>5.Homework</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart body
vocabulary, adjectives, colors and how to
describe the form of a person.


- Have them do some exercies in the
workbook from page 81 to 84 and prepare
Unit 10 - Lesson 1: A1,2,5) : How to talk
<i>about feelings</i>


- Read the text and check their predictions.
- Take notes and memorize


- Try to ask and answer the questions about
Miss Chi to make sure that everybody in
class understand how Miss Chi is.


- Look at the board.
- Work in teams.


- Take turn to choose the numbers.
- Answer the questions


- Look at the pictures on page 102.


- Students listen to the cassette and put the
pictuers in correct order by numbering
them.



1.c 2.a 3.d 4.b


- Take notes and memorize


- Do homework as the teacher requested.


* T’s evaluation:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

...
...




Teaching date: .01.09


<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 10: staying healthy</b>
<i><b> Lesson 1/60: </b></i><b>a1->2,5 how do you feel?</b>


<i><b> </b></i>


A. Aim:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to express their feelings
B. Teaching aids: Pictures


<b>C.Methods;</b>


Practice speaking
D. Procedures:



Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1.Revision:</b>


<b>Mapped dialogue</b>


- Put the dialogue on the board which is
only words. The words are cues.


<i><b> Lan </b></i> <i><b> Nam  </b></i>
How many/


?




- your B / tall ?
- short hair ?
- color / hair ?
nose/big/small?
- color / eyes?


4:F,M,B and
me


Yes.
X.
brown
small.
blue.
- Model the dialogue.



- Run through the cues like a drill with the
whole class.


<b>2 .Presentation: </b>
<b> +Vocabulary:</b>


- hungry (adj) : đói
- thirsty (adj) : khát
- full (adj) : no.
- tired (adj) : mệt
- cold (adj) : lạnh
- hot (adj) : nóng
<b>+Checking vocabulary:</b>
<b>Rub out and remember</b>


-Point to the Vietnamese translations and
rub out English words.


- Get students to call the English words.
<b>Presentation picture.</b>


- Show students the pictures and ask them
questions:


<b> + What s he / she doing?</b>‘
<i> + What s she doing?</i>‘
<i> + How does he feel?</i>
<i> + How does she feel?</i>



- Look at the board and listen to the teacher.


- Repeat after the teacher.
- Practice the dialogue in pair .
- Some pairs practice in front.
- Rewrite the dialogue


- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.
- Students repeat chorally and remember all
the English words.


- Call the English words and write the
English words if there is time.


- Look at the pictures and listen to the
teacher’s questions.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

<i> + How do you feel?</i>


- Explain the meanings of the questions and
help them to answer / express their


feelings.


<b>+ Target language: </b>


<b> A1,2 P 104 -105</b>
<b> - How do you feel?</b>
- I’m hungry.


- How does he feel?
- He feels hot.


- How does she feel?
- She feels cold.


How do / does + S + feel?
<i><b> S + am / is / are + adjective</b></i>
. Hỏi về cảm giác


- Let them take notes and memorize.
<b>3. Practice:</b>


<b>Word cue drill</b>
- Run through the cues


- you / hungry
- He / tire


- She / cold
- They / full
- He / hot


- Hold up the first cues and say the model
sentences.



<i> How do you feel? I am hungry.</i>
<i> How does he / she feel?</i>


<i> He / she s tired.</i>’


- Correct their mistakes.


<b>4.Further practice: A5 , page 106 </b>
<b>Ordering pictures</b>


- Ask students to look at the pictures in A5
on page 106


- Phuong - b) : Phuong is thirsty.
<i> She d like a drink.</i>’
- Nhan –<b> a) : </b><i> Nhan is hungry.</i>
<b> He d like noodles.</b>’
- Ba –<b> f) :</b><i> Ba is full.</i>


- Huong –<b> d) : </b><i>Huong is cold</i>


- Let students listen to the cassette and
match the names with the right pictures.
<b>5.Homework</b>


Ask students to learn by heart adjectives
of Physical State and how to express their
feelings.


- Have them prepare Unit 9 - Lesson 2:


(A3-4): Polite Offers and Requests with
“What...like?


<i> + He s hungry.</i>’
<i> + She s drinking.</i>’
<i> + She s thirty.</i>’
+ We re full.’


- Take notes and memorize.
How do / does + S + feel?
<i><b> S + am / is / are + adjective</b></i>
. Hỏi về cảm giác


- Look at the cues.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.


- Look at the pictures on page 106.


- Students listen to the cassette and
match the names with the right
pictures.


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests.


<b>*T s evaluation:</b>’


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 10: staying healthy</b>
<i><b> Lesson 2/61: A 3,4,6</b></i>


<i><b> </b></i>


A. Aim:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to express their feelings
B. Teaching aids: Pictures


<b>C.Methods;</b>


Practice speaking
D. Procedures:


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’


<b>1. Warm up:</b>


<b> - How do you feel?</b>
- Are you hot?
- Are you thirsty?
<b>Chatting</b>


- Ask students some questions about their
class.


- Teacher – whole class


<b>2 .Pre - reading: </b>
<b> +Vocabulary:</b>


<b> - Noodles (unc) : bón ,miÕn</b>
- to like :thÝch.


- a drink : thøc uèng
<b>+ checking vocab.:</b>


-Point to the Vietnamese translations and
rub out English words.


- Get students to call the English words.
<b>+ Predict dialogue</b>


- Set the scene: Lan is talking to Nam about
her classmate.


- Put the dialogue on the board. Some of
the words are missing.


<i><b>Nam: </b></i>How do you feel?


<i><b>Lan: </b></i>I’m (1) ______ and (2) _______ .


<i><b>Nam</b></i><b>: </b>What would you like?


<i><b>Lan: </b></i>I’d like some (3) _______ . What
about you?



<i><b>Nam: </b></i>I’m (4) ______ . I’d like some (5)
_- -sk students to guess what the missing
words are. ______ .


<b>3 .While reading:</b>
<b> A3, page 105</b>


<b> 1- </b>hot <b>4-</b> hungry
<b>2-</b> thirsty <b>5-</b> noodles
<b>3- </b>orange juice


<i><b>Name</b></i> <i><b>Feelings</b></i> <i><b>Would</b></i>


- Answer the teacher’s questions about
their class.


- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.
- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.


- Students repeat chorally and remember
all the English words.


- Call the English words and write the
English words if there is time.


- Listen to the teacher.
- Read the dialogue.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

<i><b>s</b></i> <i><b>like</b></i>


<i><b>Lan</b></i> <i>hot, </i>


<i>thirsty </i> <i>orange juice</i>


<i><b>Nam</b></i> <i>hungry</i> <i>noodles</i>


<i><b>Ba</b></i> <i>tired</i> <i>to sit </i>


<i>down</i>


- Ask students to read the dialogue and
check their predictions.


<b>Grid</b>


- Ask students to read the dialogue again
and complete the table.


<b>4.Post reading: </b>
<b>A6, </b>


-ask the ss to answer some questions
about what they feel and what they would
like.


<b>5.Homework:</b>



- Ask students to learn by heart
vocabulary and “would like”.


- Have them prepare Unit 10 - Lesson 3:


<i>(B4,5) : Polite request “I’d like some </i>
<i>………”</i>


- Students read the dialogue and check
their predictions.


- Read the dialogue again and
complete the table.


-answer the questions


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher requests.


*T’s evaluation:


...
...


Teaching date: .01.09

<b> UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY</b>



<b> Lesson 3/62: MY FAVORITE FOOD (B1 - 3)</b>
<i> </i>



<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know how to use “some” and “any” with
there is / are, positive, negative and Yes / No questions to talk about Food and drink.


<b>B. Teaching aids: Poster and cards.</b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Warm up:</b>


<b>Networks</b>


- Write a network on the board and put
some more words below it.


- Get students to think of food and drink.


- Give feedback.
<b>2 .Presentation: </b>
<b> +Vocabulary:</b>
an apple : quả táo
an orange : qu¶ cam
a banana : qu¶ chuèi
water (unc) : níc
rice: gạo,cơm
meat: thÞt
milk: s÷a


<b>+ checking vocab:What and where</b>



- Elicit the vocabulary from the students
and write them in the circles.


- Get students to repeat the words


including the rubbed out words by pointing
at the empty circle.


<b>+Rub out & remember dialogue</b>


- Set the scene: Phuong and Thu are
talking about food and drink.


- Put the dialogue on the board .


Phuong: What’s for lunch?.


Thu: There’s some meat and some rice.
Phuong: Are there any noodles?
Thu: No.There aren’t any noodles.
Phuong: Is there any fruit?


Thu: Yes. There is some fruit…………


- Rub out some of the words .


- Get students to isolate the model
sentence.



- Point to the model sentence and ask :
+ What s this ?’


<i> + What comes after……… ?</i>
<i> + Is it a negative sentence?...</i>


<i><b> </b><b>(+) There is/are + some +noun.</b></i>


<i><b> (?) Is/are there + any + noun? </b></i>
<i><b> (-) There is/are + not + any + N.</b></i>
<b>3. Practice: B3, page 109</b>
<b>Word cue drill</b>


- Run through the cues.
<b> - water / (+) </b>


- bananas / (-)
- rice / (-)


- oranges / (+)
- milk / (+)
- apples / (-)


- Hold up the first cues and say the model
sentences.


<i>- Is there any water?.</i>


-Students to think of the food and drink



- Listen and look at things shown by the
teacher.


- Try to say the names of food and drink
shown.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.
- Students repeat chorally and remember all
the words.


- Go to the board and fill in the circles with
the right words.


- Practice saying the dialogue.


- Remember the rubbed out words and keep
practicing it.


- Repeat the rubbed out dialogue from
memory.


- Isolate the model sentence.


- Listen to the teacher and answer the
questions:


+ There is / are
+ some / any
+ No



- copy the notes.


- Look at the cues.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

<i>- Yes. There is some water.</i>
<i>- Are there any bananas?</i>


<i>- No. There aren t any bananas.</i>’
<b>4. Further practice:</b>


<b>Guessing game.</b>


- Show them the pictures. Ask them to
choose one of the pictures.


<b> - a) noodles</b>
- b) meat
- c) oranges
- d) water
- e) vegetables


- Get the rest of the class to guess which
picture they choose. The first student
guesses the food / drink correctly comes
up to the front, chooses a new picture and
the game continues.



<b>5.Homework</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart
vocabulary and some / any with there is /
are.


- Have them prepare Unit 10 - MY
<i>FAVORITE FOOD –</i>


Lesson 4:(C4-5):


- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.


- Students look at the pictures and choose
one of them the teacher shows .


- The rest of the class asks him or her
question to find which picture he or she
chooses.


<i> * Is there any water?</i>
* Yes. There is some water.
<i> * No. There isn t any water. </i>’


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests.



Teaching date: .01.09

<b> UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY</b>



<b> Lesson 4/63: MY FAVORITE FOOD (B4 - 5)</b>
<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use uncountable and plural nouns, Polite
requests “ I’d like some ……..” and Polite offers “ What would you like ?” to tell what
they would like.


<b>B. Teaching aids: Poster and cards.</b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking
<b>D. Procedures:</b>


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1.Revision:</b>


<b>Nought and crosses</b>
<b>- Put the grid on the board</b>


<i><b>hungry</b></i> <i><b>full</b></i> <i><b>hot</b></i>


<i><b>cool</b></i> <i><b>tired</b></i> <i><b>happy</b></i>


<i><b>sad</b></i> <i><b>thirsty</b></i> <i><b>boring</b></i>



- Divide class into teams. One is noughts
(O) and the other is Crosses (X).


- Two teams choose any words in the boxes
and ask questions about feelings .


<b>2 .Presentation: </b>


- Look at the board.


- Work in groups.


- One is noughts (O) and the other is
Crosses (X).


- Choose any words in the boxes, ask and
ask questions about feelings :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

<b> +Vocabulary:</b>


- Use some fruits and pictures to introduce
new words .


- chicken (unc) : thịt gà
- a fish : cá


- bread (unc) : bánh mì.
- fruit (unc) : trái c©y


<b>+ checking vocab:What and where</b>



- Elicit the vocabulary from the students
and write them in the circles.


- Get students to repeat the words


including the rubbed out words by pointing
at the empty circle.


<b>+ Presentation text.</b>


- Ask students to read the dialogue in B4
on page 110 and answer the questions :
+ Where are they?


<i> + How does he feel?.</i>


<i> + Does he want any chicken?</i>
<i> + What does he ask</i>


<i>A- I’m hungry. I’d like some chicken</i>
<i>and some rice. What would you like?</i>
<i>B- I’m not hungry, but I’m thirsty. I’d</i>


<i>like some orange juice.</i>


<i><b>What would you like?</b></i>
<i><b> I’d like some + noun</b></i>


<b>3. Practice: </b>



<b> B1 (page 100)</b>


<b>Picture drill</b>


- Run through the pictures.
- chicken - fish


- rice - orange juice
- bread


- Hold up the first picture and say the
model sentences:


<i>+What would you like?</i>
<i>+ I’d like some chicken. </i>


- Do the same for the seccond picture.


<b>4.Further practice:</b>


<b>Mapped dialogue</b>


- Put the dialogue on the board which is
only words. The words are cues.


<i><b> Mai </b></i>

<i><b> Nam</b></i> 


- Listen to the teacher.



- Try to say the names of food and drink
shown by the teacher.


- Notice the meaning of the words.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.
- Students repeat chorally and remember all
the words.


- Go to the board and fill in the circles with
the right words.


- Listen to the teacher’s explanation.
- Read the statements.


- Answer the questions.


- Write the form in their notebooks.


- Look at the pictures.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.


- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

………. feel ?


……… like ?
………thirsty
… orange juice


cold+hungry
noodles. …
feel?


……… like?


<b>5.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart
vocabulary and Polite requests / offers.
- Have them prepare the next lesson:
C1-4. find the meaning og the newwords.


- Repeat after the teacher.
- Practice the dialogue in pair .
- Some pairs practice in front.


- Rewrite the dialogue .


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests.
* T’s evaluation:


...
...


Teaching date: .01.09

<b> UNIT 10: STAYING HEALTHY</b>



<b> Lesson 5/64: MY FAVORITE FOOD (C1-4)</b>
<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to speak about their favorite food to
contrast “Would you like…… ?” with “Do you like….?”.


<b>B. Teaching aids: Poster and pictures</b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking
<b>D. Procedures:</b>


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Warm up:Kim sgame</b>’


<b> </b>


<b> banana</b>


<i> coffee meat </i>
<i> bread</i>


<i> </i>


<i> water orange </i>


<i> fish apple</i>
- Divide class into two groups.


- Put away the poster and ask students to go
to the board and write the words they’ve
seen from memory.


<b>2 .Presentation: </b>
<b> +Vocabulary:</b>
- a corrot : cđ cµ rèt
- a bean :hạt đậu.
- a tomato :quả cà chua.
- lettuce (unc) : rau xà lách.
- a potato : củ khoai tây
- a pea :đậu hạt tròn.


- Look at the pictures of Ba’s and Chi’s
house (Page 76, 77) in 20 seconds and try
to remember as many facilities as possible.


- Work in groups.


- Listen to the teacher.


- Try to say the names of food and drink
shown by the teacher.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

- a cabbage :b¾p cải.
- an onion : củ hành



<b>+ checking vocab;</b>


<b> </b>Rub out and remember


-Point to the Vietnamese translations and
rub out English words.


- Get students to call the English words.


<b>+Predict dialogue</b>


- Set the scene: Nhan is asking Mai about
What her favorite food is.


- Put the dialogue on the board. Some of
the words are missing.


<i><b>Nhan: </b>What’s your favorite food, Mai?</i>


<i><b>Mai: </b>I like (1) _______ . .</i>


<i><b>Nhan</b></i><b>:</b> <i> Do you like vegetables?</i>


<i><b>Mai: </b></i> (2) ____ , I (3) _____.


<i><b>Nhan: </b> Do you like (4) _______ ?</i>


<i><b>Mai: </b>No, I don’t. I like (5)___ and (6)__</i>


- Ask students to guess what the missing


words are.


- Ask them to read the completed
dialogue, isolate the model sentence.


<b>+ Target language: C2, page 112</b>


I like +N


I don’t like +N
Do you like + N ...?


<b>3. Practice: </b>
<b> * C1 (page 112)</b>


<b>Picture drill</b>


- Run through the pictures.
- carrots - beans
- tomatoes - peas


- lettuce - cabbages
- potatoes - onions


- Hold up the first picture and say the
model sentences:


<i>+Do you like carrots?</i>
<i>+ Yes, I do. I like carrots.</i>



<i>+ No, I don’t. I don’t like carrots </i>


- Do the same for the seccond picture.


<b>4.Further practice:</b>


- Write the new words in their notebooks.
- Students repeat chorally and remember
all the English words.


- Call the English words and write the
English words if there is time


- Listen to the teacher.
- Read the dialogue.


- Guess what the missing words are.


- Students read the completed dialogue,
isolate the model sentence.


- Take notes and try to remember.
I like +N


I don’t like +N
Do you like + N ...?


- Look at the pictures.
- Listen to the teacher.



- Repeat it chorally and then individually.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

survey


- Put the table on the board


Name <i>likes ...</i> <i> doesn’t </i>


<i>like....<b> </b></i>


<b>5.Homework</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary and


how to talk their own favorite food.


- write the sentences about the people they say in
survey


- Some pairs practice in front.


- Look at the board and listen to the
teacher.


- put the questions and answer about what
they like and don’t like...


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests.



Teaching date: . .09

<b> UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT?</b>



<b> Lesson 1/65: AT THE STORE -A1</b>
<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to to use quantifies and containers to talk
about things people buy at the store.


<b>B. Teaching aids: Poster and cards</b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking
<b>D. Procedures:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

<b> Guessing game.</b>


- Show them some drinks. Ask them to
choose one of them.


<b> - Lemond</b>
- Soda
- Iced - tea
- Coffee


- Get the rest of the class to guess which
drink they choose. The first student
guesses the drink correctly comes up to


the front, chooses a new words and the
game continues.


<b>2 .Presentation: </b>
<b> +Vocabulary:</b>
- an egg : trứng


- Cooking oil : dầu ăn
- Beef (unc) : thịt bò
- Soap (unc) : xà phòng


- Tooth paste (unc) : kem đánh răng
- a chocolate : sô cô la


<b>+ checking vocab;</b>Slap the board


- Put the Vietnamese translation on the
board.


- Call two students of two teams to the
front of the class.


- Call out one of English words in loud
voice.


<b>Matching</b>


- Put the pictures and English words on
the board.





grams of <i><b>M</b></i>


a kilo
abar of


a can of <i><b>12</b></i>
<b>Camay</b> a box of


a packet of <i>7<b>up</b></i>


<b>200g</b> a dozen of


<i><b>Tea</b></i> a tube of <b>p/s</b>


a bottle of <b>1kg</b>


-Ask students to match English words
with the pictures .


<b>3. Practice:</b>


<b>Word cue drill</b>


- Students look at the pictures and choose
one of the drinks the teacher shows


- The rest of the class asks him or her
question to find which drink he or she


chooses.


<i>* Does he / she like ? </i>
* Yes, he / she does.
<i> * No,he / she doesn t</i>’


- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.


<b> Group works.</b>


- Say the Vietnamese translation .


- Run forward and slap the correct words
on the board.


- Continue until students have slapped all
the words.


- Look at the board.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Work in teams.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

- Run through the cues.



<b> </b>- a bottle / cooking oil
- a packet / tea
- a box / chocolates


- a kilo / rice
- 200 gram / beef
- a dozen / eggs


- Hold up the first cues and say the model
sentences.


<i>- Can I help you?</i>


<i>- Yes, I’d like 200gram of beef </i>


<b>4. Further practice</b>


<b>Pelmanism.</b>


- Stick 10 cards on the board so that the
students can only see the numbers,


<i><b>1. a bar of 6. eggs</b></i>
<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> 2. a can of 7. water</b></i>
<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> 3. a dozen 8. tea</b></i>
<i><b> 4. a bottle of 9. soap </b></i>


<i><b> 5. a packet of 10. 7up</b></i>


<b>5.Homework</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary:
Quantifies and containers.


- Have them prepare Unit 11 - <i> AT THE STORE</i>


- Lesson 2:(<i>A2-A3)</i>: <i>Listen- Specific information </i>
<i>about quanlities.</i>


- Look at the cues.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.


- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.


- Look at the board.


- Listen to the teacher’s explanation.


- Work in teams.


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests.



Teaching date: .2.09

<b> UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT?</b>



<b> Lesson 2/66: AT THE STORE -A2-3</b>
<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to listen specific information about
qualities for food shopping.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

Practice listening and speaking


<b>D. Procedures</b>:<i> </i>


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’


<b>1.Warm up: slap the board</b>
- beef - bottle
- egg - tea
<b> - dozen - water</b>
- oil - gram
- rice - chocolate
<b>2 .Pre listening: </b>


<b> +Vocabulary:</b>
- to need : cÇn.


- How much / How many : bao nhiªu


- Can I hepl you? : tôi có thể giúp gì cho
bạn?


- Half (a kilo) : nưa c©n
- a cookie : banh qui.


<b>* Checking vocabulary:</b>


<b> Rub out and remember</b>


-Point to the Vietnamese translations and
rub out English words.


- Get students to call the English words.<b> </b>
<b>* Predict dialogue A2, page 112</b>


- Set the scene:
+ Where is Ba?
+ What does he want?
+ How much / many ……?


- Put the dialogue on the board. Some of the
words are missing.


<i><b>Salesgirl: </b>Can I hepl you?</i>


<i><b>Ba: </b>Yes</i>, <i>I d like some (1) ___ , please.</i>’


<i><b>Salesgirl</b></i><b>:</b> <i> How much do you want?</i>



<i><b>Ba: </b>(2) ______ grams , please.</i>


<i><b>Salesgirl: </b> Is there any things else ?</i>


<i><b>Ba: </b>Yes, I need some (3)___ .</i>


<i><b>Salesgirl: </b>How many do you want?</i>


<i><b>Ba: </b>(4) ______ , please.</i>


- Ask students to guess what the missing
words are.


<b>3. While listening:</b>


- Get students to listen to the tape 2 times


<i> </i>
<b> </b>


- Ask students to listen the tape again,
then answer the questions.


<b> Matching A3 on page 117</b>


- Read the words in the circle


-read them after the Teacher erases.
- play the game



- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.
- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their
notebooks.


- Students repeat chorally and remember
all the English words.


- Call the English words and write the
English words if there is time.


- Listen to the teacher.


-Answer the teacher’s questoins.


- Read the dialogue.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

- Let them listen to the cassette and find
out things that people want to buy.


- Let some of students answer and ask
the whole class tvo listen to again and
check their answers


<b>4. Post listening:</b>


- Let students read the dialogue then make
a shopping list and hve students read by


themselves then do the exercises as quick
as possible.


<i><b>Things</b></i> <i><b>How much / </b><b> How </b></i>
<i><b>many</b></i>


- Cooking oil
- Rice


- Beef
- Oranges


- a bottle
- 2 kilo
- half a kilo
- half a
dozen


<b>5</b>-<b>.Homework</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart
vocabulary.


- Have them prepare Unit 11 – L 3 :
(<i>A4 )</i>:<i>How much / many.</i>




<b> </b><i><b>1. </b>beef <b>3. </b>eggs</i>



<i> <b>2. </b>200 <b>4.</b> a dozen </i>


- answer the questions


<b> </b>a. At the store d. a dozen
b. beef


c. 200


- Listen to the cassette and find out things
that people want to buy.


+ Phuong - a tube of toothpaste.
+ Ly - a bar of soap and


- a box of chocolates
+ Mai - a can of soda


+ Nam – a packet of cookies


- Read the dialogue.
- Make a shopping list.


- Replace things in the dialogue with their
own shopping list and rewrite the
dialogue.


- copy the request.
*T’s evaluation:



...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

<b> Lesson 3/67: AT THE STORE -A4</b>
<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about quantities of food and drink
using How much and How many.


<b>B. Teaching aids: text book and poster</b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking and writing
<b>D.Proceduces:</b>


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’


<b>1. Revision :</b>


<b>Dictation lists</b>


- Write the lists “How much” and “How
many” on the board.


<i><b>How much</b></i> <i><b>How many</b></i>



<b> </b>Meat
Milk
Bread
Beef
Rice
chiken


oranges
bananas
corrots
chocolates
eggs


apples


- Read: <i>oranges, meat, bananas, milk, oil,</i>
<i>bread, carrots, chocolates, beef,……… </i>


- Feedback.


<b>2 .Presentation: A4 on page 117</b>


-What do you need?


- a bottle of cooking oil and some rice..
- <i>How much rice </i>do you want?


-two kilos. And I need some oranges
- <i>How many oranges </i>do you want?
Half a dozen.



- <i><b>How much +(unc.N)+do/does+S+V?</b></i>


- <i><b>How many+(plu.N)+ do/does+S+V?</b></i>


- <i><b>S + V(want / need) + so luong</b></i>
<b>3. Practice: Board drill </b>


<i><b>Shopping list</b></i>


<i> 300g beef </i>
<i> 1 kg rice</i>
<i> 500g beans</i>
<i> 6 apples</i>
<i> 1 dozen eggs </i>
<i> 2 boottles milk</i>


<i> 3 packet noodles </i>


- Copy the lists in their notebook.


- Listen to the teacher.


- Put the words in correct colums.
- Show their answers.


-Students read the dialogue in A4 on
page 117 again .


- Make the questions to isolate the model


sentence:


-<i>How much</i> ....<i>do you want?</i>


-<i>How many ...do you want?</i>


- Read the shopping list.


- Read the phrazes.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

- Run through the phrazes.
- Say the model sentences.


- Do the same for the second cue.
- Correct their mistakes.


<b>4.Further practice:</b>


<b>Mapped dialogue</b>


- Put the dialogue on the board which is
only words. The words are cues.


<i><b> Shopkeeper</b></i>


<i><b> </b></i>

<i><b> Customer</b><b> </b></i>
Can / you ?


How much?
there / else ?



How many ?


meat
300 gram


need / pototoes
2 kilos.


- Model the dialogue.


- Run through the cues like a drill with
the whole class.


<b>5.Homework</b>


- Ask students to learn how to talk about
quanlities for shopping.


- write sentences with How much and
How many...


a. I want two bottles of milk.
b. Nam needs half a kilo of beef.


c.She wants some fishes and some rice.
d. He needs a can of peas.


- Have them prepare Unit 11 - L 4 :
(<i>B1,2,3)</i>:<i>What would you like for…? I’d </i>


<i>like …………</i>


cue then the second cue).


- Make the sentences for themselves.


- Look at the board and listen to the
teacher.


- Repeat after the teacher.
- Practice the dialogue in pair .
- Some pairs practice in front.


- Rewrite the dialogue .


- Take notes and memorize


- write sentences with How much and
How many...


a. I want two bottles of milk.
b. Nam needs half a kilo of beef.


c.She wants some fishes and some rice.
d. He needs a can of peas


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

*T’s evaluation:


...
...


...
...
... Teaching date: .2.09

<b> UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT?</b>



<b> Lesson 4/68: AT THE canteen -B1,3,4</b>
<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to practice offers and requests for food
and drink more fluently using a,an,and some.


<b>B. Teaching aids: text book and catsette</b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking and writing
<b>D.Proceduces:</b>


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Warm up :</b>


<b>Kim s game</b>’


- Have students look at the picture of food /
drink in B1 on page119 and try to
remember as many words as possible.


<i><b>rice</b></i> <i><b>noodles</b></i> <i><b>beef</b></i>
<i><b>chicken</b></i> <i><b>fish</b></i> <i><b>vegetable</b></i>



<i><b>s</b></i>
<i><b>oranges</b></i> <i><b>bananas</b></i> <i><b>orange</b></i>


<i><b>juice</b></i>


<i><b>milk</b></i> <i><b>soda</b></i> <i><b>water</b></i>


<b>Presentation: B3 on page 119</b>
<b>Presentation pictures</b>
- Show students the picture .
Say the model sentences:


+ What would you like for breakfast?
<i>+ I d like </i>’ <i>some milk. </i>


+ What would you like for lunch?


+ I d like some ’ <i>ric e , fish and a banana .</i>
<b> - What would you like for breakfast?</b>
- I d like ’ <i>some milk and a banana. </i>
- What would you like for lunch?


- I d like some meat, vegetables and ’ <i>an </i>
<i>orange.</i>


- <i><b>What would you like for + N(meal)?</b></i>


- <i><b>I d like some / a / an</b><b>’</b></i> <i><b>………</b></i>



<b>3. Practice: </b>


<b> Picture drill</b>
- Run through the pictures.
<b> </b>


- rice - soda


- Look at the picture of food and drink
(B1,Page 119) in 20 seconds and try to
remember as many words as possible.


- Work in groups.


- Students read the dialogue in A2 on page
116 again .


- Make the questions to isolate the model
sentence:


-How much beef do you
<i>want?</i>


-How many eggs do you want?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>



- noodles - meat


- bananas - fish




- milk - vegetables


- Hold up the first picture and say the
model sentences:


<i>+What would you like for</i>
<i> lunch?</i>


<i>+ I d like some meat, rice and </i>’
<i> vegetables.</i>


<b>4.Further practice</b>
<b>Survey</b>


- Get students to fill in their real names and
what time they do the following things.
<i>What would you like for….?</i>


<i> lunch</i>
<i> breakfast</i>
<i> dinner</i>
- Get them to practice in pairs:
+ What would you like for <i>…?</i>
<i> + I d like some / a / an ‘</i> <i>……….</i>
- Feedback.


<b>5.Homework</b>



- Ask students to learn vocabulary
and offers / requests for food and drink.
- Have them prepare Unit 11 - L 5 :(B2,5):
<i>Talking about prices of food and drink </i>
<i>with How much“</i> <i>… ”?</i>


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.


- Fill in their real names and what time
they do the following things.


- Practice in pairs.


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests.


 <i>T s evaluation</i>’ <i> :</i>


<i>...</i>
<i> ………</i>
...
.


Teaching date: .2.09

<b> UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT?</b>




<b> Lesson 5/69: AT THE canteen -B2,5</b>
<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “ How much ……… “ to talk
about prices.


<b>B. Teaching aids: text book and poster</b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking and writing
<b>D.Proceduces:</b>


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1.Revision: </b>


<b>Bingo</b>
- Put the table on the board.


<b> a can of soda, a bottle of water, some </b>
rice, a glass of orange juice, some meat,
some oranges, some fish, some vegetables,
some chicken, a bowl of noodles


-Look at the board.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Choose any five things.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

-Ask students to choose any five things


and copy them into their books


<b>2 .Presentation: </b>
<b> +Vocabulary : </b>
- Fifty : 50.


- a hundred (Two hundred) : 100 (200)
- a thousand(Two thousand): 1000 / 2000
- seven thousand five hundred : 7.500.
+ Checking vocabulary


Slap the board
- Put the numbers on the board.




100 2000


- Call two students of two teams to the
front of the class.


- Call out one of numbers in English in
loud voice.


<b>+Presentation text</b>


- Ask students to read a menu


in A5 on page 120 then anwer some


questions about prices to isolate the model
sentence:


+ How much is a fried rice?
+ How much is a cake?
<i> + How much is a sandwich?</i>


- Let students copy the notes in their
notebooks and memorize.


+ Target language:
- <i><b>How much + be + S ?</b></i>
<i><b> - It / they + be + price</b></i>


<b>3. Practice:</b>


<b>Board drill</b>
- Put a menu on the board.


<i><b>How much is / are</b><b>…</b><b>?</b></i> <i><b>It s / they re</b></i>’ ’


- a fried rice <i>2,500d</i>


- a bowl of noodles <i>3,000d</i>


- a sandwich <i>1,500d</i>


- a cake <i>500d</i>


- an orange juice <i>1,800d</i>



- a lemon juice <i>1,000d</i>


- an ice-cream <i>2,000d</i>


- Run through the phrazes.
- Say the model sentences.
<b>4.Further practice:</b>


<b>Nought and crosses</b>
- Put the grid on the board


<i><b>2,500</b></i> <i><b>500</b></i> <i><b>3,000</b></i>


- Shouts “Bingo”.


- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.
Group works.


- Say the numbers in English .


- Run forward and slap the correct numbers
on the board.


- Students have slapped all the numbers.


- Students read the menu.


- Answer the questions about prices to
isolate the model sentence:


+ It s 2,500 d.’
+ It s 500 d.’
+ It s 1,500d .’


- Copy the notes in the notebooks and
memorize.


- Read the shopping list.
- Read the phrazes.


- Repeat after the teacher (The fisrt cue
then the second cue).


- Make the sentences for themselves.


- Look at the board.
- Work in groups.


- One is noughts (O) and the other is
Crosses (X).


- Choose any words in the boxes, ask and


500 500



2000


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

<i><b>4,800</b></i> <i><b>10,000</b></i> <i><b>1,000</b></i>


<i><b>1,200</b></i> <i><b>8,500</b></i> <i><b>5,000</b></i>


Divide class into teams. One is noughts
(O) and the other is Crosses (X).


- Two teams choose any words in the boxes
and ask questions about prices .


5.Homework


- Ask students to learn vocabulary and
structures (Unit 11).


- Have them do exercises in the exercise
book from page 43 to 46 and prepare Unit
11 –


L6-GRAMMAR PRACTICE: like,
<i>a/an/some/any, adjectives question </i>
<i>words</i>


ask questions about prices :
<i>+How much is it / are they?</i>
<i>+It is 500.</i>


<i>+ They are 10,000.</i>



- Take notes and memorize


- Do homework as the teacher suggests


Teaching date: .2.09


<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT?</b>


<i> Lesson 6/70: GRAMMAR PRACTICE</i>


<i> </i><b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to practice in like and dislike,
countabilitiy, adjectives, question words, present


<b>B. Teaching aids: text book and poster</b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking and writing
<b>D.Proceduces:</b>


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’


<b>1.Present simple tense: </b><i><b>Like</b></i>


<b>Dialogue build.</b>


- Read the dialogue and write few key


words on the board to help students
remember what the two speaker in the
dialogue say to each other .


<i><b> a) </b>- Do you ____ noodles?</i>
<i> - Yes, I _____ noodles.</i>
<i> - _____ you _____ rice?</i>
<i> - No, ____ ____ ____ rice.</i>
<i> <b>b) </b>- ____ she____ chicken?</i>
<i> - Yes. She ____ chicken.</i>
<i> - ____ she ____ fish?</i>
<i> - No. She ____ ____ fish.</i>


- Get students to write in the missing
words on the board.


<b>2.A / an / some / any:</b>


<b>Nought and crosses</b>


- read the dialogue


-Answer the teacher’s question.


- Look at the board and listen to the
teacher carefully.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

- Put the grid on the board.


<i><b>3</b></i> <i><b>5</b></i> <i><b>8</b></i>



<i><b>1</b></i> <i><b>6</b></i> <i><b>2</b></i>


<i><b>7</b></i> <i><b>4</b></i> <i><b>9</b></i>


<i><b>1. any 2. any 3. some 4. some 5. any</b></i>
<i><b>6. some 7. any 8. some 9. a</b></i>


<b>3. Adjectives:</b>


<b>Pelmanism.</b>


- Stick 10 cards on the board so that the
students can only see the numbers, make
sure the words are mixed up.


<b> </b><i><b>1. tall 6. thin</b></i>
<i><b> 2. weak 7. full</b></i>
<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> 3. hot 8. short</b></i>


<i><b> 4. fat 9. strong </b></i>
<i><b> 5. hungry 10. cold</b></i>


<b>4.Question words: </b>


<b>Lucky numbers</b>


- Write the numbers on the board.



<b> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 </b>
<b>8 </b>


<b> 1 </b><i><b>Lucky number</b></i><b>. 7 - a </b>Who


<b> 2 - b </b>What <b>8 - e </b>Where


<b> 3 - d </b>What


<b> 4 </b><i><b>Lucky number</b></i><b>.</b>
<b> 5 - c </b>How


<b> 6 </b><i><b> Lucky number</b></i><b>.</b>


- Divide class into teams. The teams take
turn to choose the numbers.


- Tell students that they have to answer
the questions .


<b>5. Present simple and present </b>


<b> progressive tense:</b>
<b>Transformation drill</b>


- Ask students to remind Present simple
and present progressive tense.


- Look at the board.


- Work in groups.


- One is noughts (O) and the other is
Crosses (X).


- Choose any words in the boxes, ask and
ask questions about feelings :


<i>+Do you have any bananas?</i>
<i>+No, I don’t have any bana..</i>


, <i>but I have some oranges</i>


- Look at the board.


- Listen to the teacher’s explanation.


- Work in teams.


- Look at the board.


- Work in teams.


- Take turn to choose the numbers.
- Listen to the teacher carefully.
- Answer the questions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

<b> - </b><i><b>S + Vs / es ………(every day)</b></i>
<i><b> - S + is / am / are + Ving…(now)</b></i>



<b>a)</b> <i>is eating d) is going</i>
<b>b)</b> <i>are drinking e) is getting</i>
<b>c)</b> <i>is riding f) is traveling</i>


- Ask students to have to turn into a new
sentences using present progressive tense.


<b>3.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to review vocabulary and
Grammar points (Unit9 – Unit11) and exercises
in the exercise book from Unit 9 to Unit 11 .
- Have them prepare <i> FORTY-FIVE MINUTE </i>
<i>TEST </i>.


<b> - </b><i><b>S + Vs / es ………(every day)</b></i>
<i><b> - S + is / am / are + Ving…(now)</b></i>


- Have to turn into a new sentence using
progressive tense.


- Review vocabulary and Grammar
points (Unit9 – Unit11) and exercises in
the exercise book from Unit 9 to Unit 11 .
- Prepare <i> FORTY-FIVE MINUTE TEST</i>.
Teaching date: .2.09


<b>Lesson 71: </b>



<b> FORTY- FIVE MINUTE TEST</b>



A. Aim: Help students revise grammar points and vocabulary from Unit 9 to Unit 11.
B. Content:


I. LISTENING: Listen to some people talking to the storekeeper and write how much
<i> they need (2ms)</i>


1.____________ rice.
2.____________ eggs.
3.____________ beef.
4.____________ oranges.


II. GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY (2.5ms): Choose the best answer to the
<i>sentences</i>


1. I don’t have _____ oranges.


a. any b. some c. one


2. There is ____ fruit juice on the table.


a. some b. any c. an


3. He isn’t tall. He’s ______ .


a. fat b. short c. thin


4. ____ is her hair? – It’s black.



a. What b. who c. What color


5. What would you like? I ______ some milk.


a. like b. likes c. ‘d like


6. ________ meat do you need? – A kilo.


a. How much b. How many c. How


III. READING: Read the paasage, then do the exercise(3ms)


Minh studies far from his house. So he has lunch at the school’s canteen. The
food here is very cheap and good. He has some rice, meat and tomatoes for lunch. His
favorite vegetables are tomatoes and lettuce .


<i>1. Write True / False before each sentence:</i>
____ a. Minh studies far from his house.
____ b. He has lunch at home.


____ c. The food at the canteen is not cheap and good.
____ d. He often has noodles for lunch.


<i>2. Answer the questions:</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

b. How is the food?


c. What are his favorite vegetables?


IV. WRITING: Write four sentences using I would like <i>“</i> <i>……… ”.. </i>(2.5ms)



<i> </i>


<i> Teaching date: .2.09</i>
<i> </i><b>UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PAST TIMES</b>


<b> Lesson 1/72: WHAT ARE YOU DOING? (A1,2)</b>
<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to Further practice in present progressive
and sports vocabulary to talk about what people are doing


<b>B. Teaching aids: text book , pictures and poster</b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking and writing
<b>D.Proceduces:</b>


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Revision: </b>


<b> Hangman</b>


- Draw strokes on the board. Each stroke
stands for a letter of the word.


_ _ _ _ _ _ (sports)



_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (pastimes)


- The teacher draws a stroke if a student’s
guess is not right.


- The teacher gives the answer if they lose.
<b>2 .Presentation:</b>


- Use pictures to introduce new words
<b> to swim : bơi lội</b>


to play badminton : chơi cầu lông
to jog :®i bé thĨ dơc


to do aerobics :tập thể dục nhịp điệu
to play table tennis : chơi bóng bàn
to skip : nhảy dây


<b>Rub out and remember</b>


-Point to the Vietnamese translations and
rub out English words.


- Get students to call the English words.


<b>2 .Presentation: </b>


Try to help students to review the
tenses : present simple and present
progressive.



- Students take turn to guess the letters of
the words.


- Give a letter in the alphabet.
- Have to try to guess the word.


- Find out the word


- Listen and look at the pictures shown by
the teacher.


- Try to say the names of activities shown.
- Write the new words in their notebooks.
-Students repeat chorally and remember
all the English words.


- Call the English words and write the
English words if there is time


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

<b> </b>- <i>He is swimmimg.</i>


<i> - They are playing badminton.</i>
<i> - She is skipping</i>


<b>3. Practice:</b>


<b>Word cue drill</b>


- Run through the cues.



<b> </b>- He / swim


- She / do aerobics
- They / play tennis


- They / play soccer
- He / jog


- She / skip


- Hold up the first cues and say the model
sentences.


<i>- What is he doing?</i>
<i>- He is swimming. </i>


- Do the same for the second cue.


<b>4.Further practice:</b>


<b>Nought and crosses</b>


- Put the grid on the board.


<i><b>Picture i</b></i> <i><b>Picture</b><b><sub>a</sub></b></i> <i><b>Picture</b><b><sub>b</sub></b></i>
<i><b>Picture g</b></i> <i><b>Picture</b><b><sub>h</sub></b></i> <i><b>Picture</b><b><sub>c</sub></b></i>
<i><b>Picture f</b></i> <i><b>Picture</b><b><sub>e</sub></b></i> <i><b>Pictured</b></i>


<b>5.Homework</b>



- Ask students to learn vocabulary and
present progressive tense.


- Have them prepare Unit 12 - L 2 :(<i></i>
<i>A3-5)</i>:<i>Reading a text and practising “Which” </i>
<i>question.</i>


present simple and present
progressive


- Look at the cues.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.


- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.


- Look at the board.
- Work in groups.


- One is noughts (O) and the other is
Crosses (X).


- Choose any words in the boxes, ask and
ask questions about prices :



<i>+Picture c</i>


<i>+What are they doing?</i>
<i>+ They are playing soccer.</i>


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests.


*T’s evaluation:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>

<i> </i>
<i> Teaching date: .2.09</i>


<i> </i><b>UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PAST TIMES</b>


<b> Lesson 2/73: Which sports are you play? (A3 - 5)</b>
<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read short texts about sports and
practising “Which” questions with simple present tense to talk about people’s regular
exsrcise .


<b>B. Teaching aids: text book , pictures and poster</b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking and writing
<b>D.Proceduces:</b>



Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Warm up:</b>


slap the board: get the ss to play the game
– slap on the pictures


<b>2 .Pre - reading: </b>


<b>Open prediction</b>


- Introduce the two chracters Lan and
Nam, ask students to predict which sports
Lan and Nam do.


<b>3 .While reading:</b>
<b> A4 on page 126</b>


- Ask students to read the text about Lan
and Nam


- Ask students to read then answer the
questions below.


- Check whether their answer are right or
wrong.


<b>Group works.</b>
- Say the numbers in English .


- Run forward and slap the correct pictures


on the board.


- Students have slapped all the pictures


- Listen to the teacher.


- Guess which sports they do.


- Students read the text and check their
predictions.


<i><b>Lan: Swim, do aerobics, play </b></i>
<i>badminton.</i>


<i><b> Nam: Play soccer, jog, play table </b></i>
<i>tennis.</i>


- Read the text again and answer the
questions below


<b>Reading comprehension</b>


<i><b>a)</b></i> <i>She swims, does aerobics and plays</i>
<i>badminton.</i>


<i><b>b)</b></i> <i>No, she doesn t.</i>’


<i><b>c)</b></i> <i>He plays soccer, table tennis and jogs.</i>
<i>Yes, he does. </i>



-Write the questions and answers in the
notebook


- Try to tell about their favorite sports and
tennis


volleyball
swim


aerobics
Table


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

4. Post –<b> reading:</b>


Which sports do you do?


<i><b>soccer</b></i> <i><b>swim</b></i> <i><b>tennis</b></i> <i><b>skip</b></i> <i><b>jog</b></i>


- Let the ss practice with their partners:
+ Which sports do you do?


<i> + I swim.</i>
<i> + What else?</i>
<i> + I play volleyball.</i>


<i> + Do you play table tennis?</i>
<i> + Yes, I do.</i>


<b>5.Homework:</b>



- Ask students to learn by heart sports
vocabulary and “Which sports do you
do?”.


- Have them prepare Unit 12 - Lesson 3:
<i>(B1-3) : Writing short text about what we </i>
<i>do……</i>


ask their friends about theirs.


- Practice with partners.


- Tell the teacher what they have asked
their partner,


e.g.<i>“Hoa swims. She plays volleyball and </i>
<i>table tennis………”</i>


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher requests


*T’s evaluation:


...
...
...


<i> </i> <i>Teaching date: .2.09</i>


<i> </i><b>UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PAST TIMES</b>


<b> Lesson 3/74: Free time-B1-3</b>


<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read writing short texts about what we
do in our free time.


<b>B. Teaching aids:</b>


text book , pictures
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking and writing
<b>D.Proceduces:</b>


Teacher s activities’ <b> ss activities</b>’


<b>1. Warm up:</b>


<b> Guessing game.</b>


- Show them the picture. Ask them to
choose one of activities.


<b> - swim</b>
<b> - go joging</b>


<b> - play volleyball </b>


<b> - do aerobics</b>


- Students look at the picture and choose
one of the activities the teacher shows .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

<b> - skip</b>


<b>2 .Pre - writing: </b>
<b> * Vocabulary:</b>


- Free time : thời gian rãnh.
- to go fishing : đi câu cá.


- to go to the movies : ñi xem phim.


<b>Open prediction</b>


- Introduce the two chracters Lan and
Nam, ask students to predict which
sports Lan and Nam do.


<b>* Checking vocabulary</b>


<b>Rub out and remember</b>


-Point to the Vietnamese translations and
rub out English words.


- Get students to call the English words.



<b>3 .While writing:</b>
<b> B1 on page 127</b>


- Ask students to read the text about Lan
and Nam.


- Ask students to read then answer the
questions below.


- Check whether their answer are right or
wrong.


<b>4.Post reading: </b>


<b>Pyramid</b>


- Ask students to work in groups. Each
student writes three things about they do
in their free time.


- read the words
- copy the words.


- Listen to the teacher.


- Guess which sports they do.


- Students repeat chorally and remember
all the English words.



- Call the English words and write the
English words if there is time


- Students read the text and check their
predictions.


<i> <b>a) </b>Phuong <b>goes</b> to the movies in his …</i>
<i> <b>b) </b>Ly <b>watches</b> TV.</i>


<i> <b>c) </b>Nam <b>reads</b> in his free time.</i>
<i> <b>d) </b>Lan <b>listens</b> to music.</i>


<i> <b>e) </b>Tuan <b>goes</b> fishing.</i>
<i> <b>f) </b>Long <b>plays</b> video games</i>


Read the text again and answer the
questions below.


- Write the questions and answers in the
notebook.


- Work in groups.


- Each student write three things about
they do in their free time.


- Read aoud.


-San writes: <i>I watch TV, go fishing…</i>



-Thuy writes: <i>I watch TV,go to the park</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

<b>5.Homework</b>


Ask students to learn by heart sports
vocabulary and Simple present tense.
- Have them prepare Unit 12 - Lesson 4:


<i>(B4-5) : “How often” questions and </i>
<i>answers</i>


<i>watch TV. San and Chinh play football. </i>
<i>San goes fishing. Thuy goes to the park and</i>
<i>play badminton………… </i>


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher requests.


Teaching date: . .09
Lesson 75: Correcting the test


<b>A. Aim :</b>


By the end of the lesson , the ss will be able to realize how well they did the test and
realize their mistakes in doing the test.


<b>B. Teaching aids:</b>
Test papers
<b>C.Methods:</b>



- Having the ss realize their good and bad points in the tests.
-practice writing the test in the notebooks.


D. Proceduces:


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1.Remarks:</b>


- nhìn chung hs nắm đợc lý thuyết và biết
vận dụng kiến thức để làm bài kiểm tra. Vì
thế kết quả khá cao.


- kiến thức trọng tâm : kiểm tra từ vựng và
ngữ pháp trong ba đơn vị bài học 9,10 và
11.


- kỹ năng : trắc nghiệm ngữ pháp và từ
vựng, viết , đọc hiểu


- kiến thức đợc hệ thống và đợc ôn kĩ nên
HS vận dụng làm bài khá tốt.


- Tuy nhiên đối với Hs lớp 6A, ý thức học
bài và làm bài của đa số em cha cao , kết
quả còn thấp.


<b>2.Correcting the test:</b>


<b>Câu 1: Gạch chân dới một đáp án </b>


<b>đúng:(4 đỉểm)</b>


1.won’t finish
2.is being built
3.don’t


4.not to put
5.into


6.doesn’t she?
7.going


8.however
9.water
10. has learnt


<b>Câu2: Nối câu dùng từ cho trong ngoặc:</b>
<b>(2 điểm)</b>


1.It was hot so I turned on the air-
conditioner.


2.If I have time, I will go to see you.


<b>-listen to the teacher’s remarks.</b>


- copy the answers
1.won’t finish
2.is being built



3.don’t
4.not to put


5.into
6.doesn’t she?


7.going
8.however


9.water
10. has learnt
1.It was hot so I turned on the air-
conditioner.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

3. We should use tree leaves to wrap food
instead of using plastic bags.


4.I suggest putting the garbage in the right
position.


<b>Câu 3: Sắp xếp các ý thành một lá th </b>
<b>phàn nàn: (2 điểm)</b>


5-1-3-4-2


<b>Câu 4: Hoàn thành câu(2 điểm)</b>
1.This letter was writen 2 days ago.
2.I think you should do your exercises
carefully.



3.If you go to work or go to school by
bikes ,you will save energy.


<b>3. Results:</b>
<b>Líp 6B:</b>


<b> ®iĨm 9,10:...</b>
®iĨm 7,8:...
®iĨm 5,6:...
<b>Líp 6D:</b>


®iĨm 9,10:...
®iĨm 7,8:...
®iĨm 5,6:...
díi 5:...
<b>Líp 6A:</b>


®iĨm 9,10:...
®iĨm 7,8:...
®iĨm 5,6:...
díi 5:...


3. We should use tree leaves to wrap food
instead of using plastic bags.


4.I suggest putting the garbage in the right
position.


5-1-3-4-2



1.This letter was writen 2 days ago.
2.I think you should do your exercises
carefully.


3.If you go to work or go to school by bikes
,you will save energy.


<b> - ghi nhí vµ rót kinh nghiệm cho các bài </b>
kiểm tra lần sau.




Teaching date: .3.09


<i> </i><b>UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PAST TIMES</b>
<b> Lesson 4/76: Free time-B4-5</b>


<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “How often” questions and answers
“ 0nce, twice, three times ………… a week” to talk about frequency activities .


<b>B. Teaching aids:</b>


text book , pictures and castette
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking and listening


<b>D.Proceduces:</b>


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1.Revision: </b>


<b> B4 on page 128 Matching</b>
- Set the sence: What do you do in your
<i>free time?Now listen to the tape about</i>
<i>What Tan/ Minh and Nam/ Lien /Lan and</i>
<i>Mai do in their free time.</i>


- Tan - f
<i><b> - Minh and Nam - e</b></i>
<i><b> - Lien - a</b></i>
<i><b> - Lan and Mai - b</b></i>
- Run through the pictures.


- Get students to match the names with the


- Answer theteacher’s questions.


- Repeat after the teacher.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

right pictures.
<b>2 .Presentation: </b>
<b> +Vocabulary:</b>


- Once (adv) : mét lÇn
- Twice (adv) : hai lÇn
- Three times: ba lÇn


- a week :mét tuÇn.


- How often …… : thêng nh thÕ nµo
<b>+ Checking vocabulary:</b>


<b>What and where</b>


- Elicit the vocabulary from the students
and write them in the circles.


- Get students to repeat the words


including the rubbed out words by pointing
at the empty circle.


<b>+ Target language: </b>
<b>Ordering</b>


- Write a dialogue which is in wrong
orders on the board.


<i>- She goes joging.</i>


<i> - How often does she listen to music?</i>
<i> - She reads three times a week.</i>


<i> - How often does Ly go joging?</i>
<i> - She listen to music twice a week.</i>
<i> - How often does she read?</i>



- Get students to listen to the tape then put
the statements in the correct orders.


- Get students to isolate the model
sentences.


<b> </b><i><b>- How often + do / does + s + V</b><b>…</b><b>?</b></i>
<i><b> - Once / twice / three times a week. </b></i>


<b>3. Practice:</b>


<b>Substitution drill</b>


- Get students to repeat the numbers
<i>(three, one, two……).</i>


<i>- Three, one, two, four, five, seven.</i>
<b>Picture drill</b>


- Run through the pictures.
- B5 on page 129:


- play badminton / three times
- listen to music / twice


- go joging / once
- play tennis / once
- watch TV / twice
- read / three times



- go to the movies / twice


- Hold up the first picture and say the
model sentences:


<i>+How often does Ly watch TV?</i>
<i>+ She watches TV twice a week.</i>


- Do the same for the seccond picture.


<b>4.Further practice: </b>


- ask the ss to say about them like Ly’s
diary.


ex: I go fishing once e week.


<b>5.Homework</b>


- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.


- Students repeat chorally and remember all
the words.



- Go to the board and fill in the circles with
the right words


- Students read the statements.


- Listen to the tape then put the statements
in the correct orders.


- Isolate the model sentences


- Copy the notes in the notebooks and
memorize.


- Repeat the numbers (three, one, two<i>……).</i>
- Three times.


- Look at the pictures.


- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

- Ask students to learn adverbs of
frequency.


- Have them do exercise B1-5 in the


exercise book and prepare Unit 12 – L5-
C1– C4<i>: Reading and practising adverds </i>
<i>of frequency with the simple present </i>
<i>tense. </i>


- Take notes and memorize


- Do homework as the teacher suggests


Teaching date: .3.09


<i> </i><b>UNIT 12: SPORTS AND PAST TIMES</b>
<b> Lesson 4/77: How often? C1-6</b>


<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the details and practice
adverbs of frequency with the simple present tense. .


<b>B. Teaching aids:</b>


text book , pictures
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking
<b>D.Proceduces:</b>


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’


<b>1.Revision:</b>


<b>Nought and crosses</b>
- Put the grid on the board.


<i><b>swim</b></i> <i><b><sub>books</sub></b><b>read</b></i> <i><b>play tennis</b></i>


<i><b>go to school</b></i> <i><b>play soccer</b></i> <i><b><sub>homework</sub></b><b>do</b></i>


<i><b>watch tv</b></i> <i><b>listen to</b><b><sub>music</sub></b></i> <i><b><sub>badminton</sub></b><b>play</b></i>


- Divide class into teams. One is noughts
(O) and the other is Crosses (X).


- Two teams choose any words in the boxes
and ask questions about activities .


<b>2 .Pre - reading:</b>
<b> Vocabulary:</b>


<b> </b>- Always (adv) : luôn luôn.
- Usually (adv) : thường thường.
- Often (adv) : thường.


- Sometimes (adv) : thỉnh thoảng.
- Never (adv) : không bao giờ


- Look at the board.


- Work in groups.



- One is noughts (O) and the other is
Crosses (X).


- Choose any words in the boxes, ask and
ask questions about activities :


<i>+read books.</i>


<i>+How often do you read books?</i>
<i>+Twice a week.</i>


- Listen to teacher .


- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the Vietnamese translation.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

<b>Slap the board</b>
- Put the signs on the board.


- Call two students of two teams to the
front of the class.


- Call out one of adverbs in English in
loud voice.


<b>3 .While reading:</b>


<b>Guessing meaning</b>



- Ask students to use the pictures and read
the text to match the Vietnamese with the
new vocabulary in context.


<i> 1. tha dieu = fly a kite.</i>
<i> 2. cai lieu = a tent</i>
<i> 3. di cam trai = go camping</i>
<i> 4. di da ngoai = have a picnic.</i>


<b>Grid</b>
- Put the table on the board.


How often never so often ussua <sub>alwa</sub>
zoo


park
picnic
sports
camp
school
homework


- Get students to reread the text then
complete the table.


- Get students to share the answers with
their partners.


- Feed back



<b>Answer given</b>


- Ask students to ask questions and
answer:


<i>+ How often do they go to the zoo?</i>
<i> + They sometimes go to the zoo.</i>
<b>4.Post reading: </b>


<b>Writing</b>


- Have students write about activities in
their free time using adverbs of
frequency: <i>always</i>, <i>usually, often,</i>
<i>sometimes, never</i> .


<b> I often go to the zoo. I never………</b>
<b>5.Homework </b>


- Ask students to learn by heart advebs
of frequency and “How often
………?”.


<b>Group works.</b>


- Say the signs in English .


- Run forward and slap the correct signss
on the board.



- Students have slapped all the numbers.


- Students read the text and use the pictures
to match the Vietnamese with the new
vobulary.


- Read the table on the board.


- Read the text again and complete the
table.


- Share their answer with their partners.


- Ask and answer the questions..


- Write about activities in their free time.
- Write individually and then share with
their partners.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

- Have them read <i>C5 at home</i>


Teaching date: .3.09


<i> </i><b>UNIT 13: Activities and the seasons</b>
<b> Lesson 1/78: A1-2</b>


<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>



By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know seasons vocabulary with “What’s
the weather like…….” to talk about the seasons and the weather .


<b>B. Teaching aids:</b>


text book , catsette
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking and listening
<b>D.Proceduces:</b>


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Revision: Jumbled words</b>


-Write numbers whose letters are in
disorder.


<b> - oht = hot</b>
- codl = cold
- like = like
- whta = what


- Divide the class into two teams.


- Ask students from each team to go to the
board and write the correct words .


<b>2 .Presentation: </b>
<b> +Vocabulary:</b>


The seasons :mïa.


The spring :mùa xuân.
The summer: mùa hè
The fall : mùa thu.
The winter : mùa đông
The weather : thời tiết
Warm (adj) : ấm ỏp


Cool (adj) :mát mẻ.
* Checking vocabulary:
<b>Ordering</b>


- Write new words which are in wrong
orders on the board.


<b> 3. The winter 8. the fall 7. cool</b>
<i> 4. warm 2. seasons 5. the spring</i>
<i> 1. the weather 6. the summer </i>
- Get students to listen to the tape then put
the statements in the correct orders by
numbering


<b>+Presentation text</b>


- ask students to read the sentences in A1
on page 134 to isolate the model


senetences:



+ What s the weather like in the ’
<i>summer?</i>


<b>+ Target language: </b>


<b> - What’s the weather like in the </b>
<i> summer?</i>


-Look at the board.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Work in teams.


- Go to the board and write the correct
words. (One word, one student).


- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebooks


- Students new words which are in wrong
order.


- Listen to the tape then number them


- Read the sentences to isolate the model
sentences:



+ it s hot in the summer.’


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

- It’s hot


<b> </b><i><b>- What s the weather like </b><b>’</b></i> <i><b>………</b><b>?</b></i>
<i><b> - It s </b><b>’ ………</b><b>. . . </b></i>


<b>3. Practice:</b>


<b>Word cue drill</b>
- Run through the cues.
<b> a - hot / summer </b>


b - cold / winter
c - warm / spring


d - cool / fall


- Hold up the first cues and say the model
sentences.


<i>- What s the weather like in the summer?</i>’
<i>- It s hot in the summer. </i>’


- Do the same for the second cue.
- Correct their mistakes


<b>4. Further practice:</b>


- ask the ss to answer about the weather in


Ky Anh to day:


<b> What is the weather like in Ky Anh </b>
<b>today?</b>


- give the ss the chart of the weather
forcast and ask them to ask and answer
about the weather in some cities:


.Ha noi-36oC
. Hue – 25 oC
. tp HCM -28 o C


<b>5.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn seasons vocabulary
and how to talk about the weather.


- Have them prepare Unit 13 -- L5- A3:
<i>Talking about what weather you like. </i>


- Look at the cues.


- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.



- answer about the weather in Ky Anh
to day:


It’s cold


- ask and answer about the weather in some
cities:


What ‘s the weather like in Hanoi today?
It’s hot.


What ‘s the weather like in Hue today?
It’s cool.


What ‘s the weather like in HCM city
today?


It’s warm.


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests.


Teaching date: .3.09


<i> </i><b>UNIT 13: Activities and the seasons</b>
<b> Lesson 2/79: A3- The weather and the seasons</b>
<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>



By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use“ What weather do you like?” to
talk about their favorite weather.


<b>B. Teaching aids:</b>


text book , poster
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking and writing
<b>D.Proceduces:</b>


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>

<b>Bingo</b>


- Write 10 words about the weather on
the board.


<b> Summer , cool, winter, cold, fall</b>
<i> Warm . spring, hot, weather, season</i>


-Ask students to choose any five words
and copy them into their notebooks.


<b>2 .Presentation: </b>


<b>Predict dialogue</b>


- Set the scene:



<i>Lan asks Mai about Mai’s favorite</i>
<i>weather. </i>


<i> + What is her favorite weather?</i>


- Put the dialogue on the board. Some of
the words are missing.


<i><b>Lan: </b>What’s the weather like today?</i>


<i><b>Mai: </b>It’s (1) ___ .</i>


<i><b>Lan</b></i><b>:</b> <i> Do you like (2) ____ weather?</i>


<i><b>Mai: </b>No, I don’t .</i>


<i><b>Lan: </b> <b>What weather do you like</b> ?</i>


<i><b>Mai: I like (3)______ weather</b></i>


- Ask students to guess what the missing
words are.


<b>+ Target language: </b>


<i> -What weather +do /does+S+ like?</i>
<i><b>- S + like / likes +…………+ weather. </b></i>
<b>3. Practice:</b>



<b> - A3 on page 135:</b>


<b>Picture drill</b>


- Run through the pictures.
- I / hot


- we / cold
- She / cool
- They / warm


- Hold up the first picture and say the
model sentences:


<i>+What weather do you like?</i>
<i>+ I like hot weather.</i>


- Do the same for the seccond picture.


<b>4.Further practice:</b>


- Read the words on the board.
- Choose any four words.
- Listen to the teacher and


put ticks next to the words that they listen
to.


- Shouts “Bingo”.



- Listen to the teacher.


-Answer the teacher’s questoins.
- Read the dialogue.


- Guess what the missing words are.
- Students give their prediction.


- Look at the pictures.


- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.


- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

<b>Mapped dialogue</b>


- Put the dialogue on the board which is
only words. The words are cues.


<i><b> Tra Vinh</b></i>


<i><b> </b></i>

<i><b> Ha noi</b><b> </b></i>
-What / HN ?


- hot
- cold
-What /


like ?


- Come / TV


cold …………
TV?


What / like?
Come / HN !
hot.


- Model the dialogue.


- Run through the cues like a drill with
the whole class.


<b>5.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn seasons
vocabulary and how to talk about their
favorite weather.


- Have them prepare Unit 13 – L3-
A4-5<i>: When” and “WH”questions. </i>


- Look at the board and listen to the
teacher.


- Repeat after the teacher.
- Practice the dialogue in pair .


- Some pairs practice in front.
- Rewrite the dialogue


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests


<i>*T’s evaluation:</i>


<i>...</i>
<i>...</i>
<i>...</i>
<i>...</i>


Teaching date: .3.09


<i> </i><b>UNIT 13: Activities and the seasons</b>
<b> Lesson 3/80: A4-5- The weather and the seasons</b>
<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “ When” clauses in positive
staemanets and “WH” questions to talk about what they do in different weather.
<b>B. Teaching aids:</b>


text book , cards
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking and writing
<b>D.Proceduces:</b>



<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’


<b>1. Warm up: Brainstorm</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

- Ask students to think of town and the
country


<i> listen to music</i>
<b> go for a walk fly a kite</b>
<b> watch TV </b>


<b> Pastimes </b>
<i>play badminton</i>


<i> go swimming</i>
<b> play video games</b>


- Get them to go to the board and write
down their ideas.


<b>2 .Presentation: </b>


<b>Predict </b>


- Set the scene: <i>You are going to read a</i>
<i>short passage about Ba. Guess what Ba</i>
<i>does in different weather. (hot, cold, cool</i>
<i>and warm)</i>



<b> a. </b>hot ? <b>b. </b>cold ? <b>c. </b>cool <b>d.</b> warm ?
- Let students read the text themselves.
- Ask some students some questions and
let them answer loudly.


- Point to the questions and get students
to isolate the model sentences .


<b>+ Target language: </b>
<b>3. Practice:</b>


<b>Word cue drill</b>


- Run through the cues.


<b> </b>- cold / go jogging


- cool / do aerobics
- hot / go swimming


- warm / go to the park


- Hold up the first cues and say the model
sentences.


<i>- What do you do when it’s </i>
<i> cold?</i>


<i>- I go jogging when it’s cold. </i>



- Do the same for the second cue.


<b>4. Further practice: A4, page 136</b>


- Students to think of the town and
country.


- Go to the board and write down
their idea


- Listen to the teacher.


- Guess what Ba does in different
weather.


- Students give their predictions.
- Read the text.


-Answer the teacher’s questoins.
- Give the form, meaning and use.


<i> <b>-</b><b>What+do /does+S+ do+ when it’s….?</b></i>
<i><b> - When it’s…………, S + V………..</b></i>


- Look at the cues.


- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.


- Practice in pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

<b>Transformation writing</b>


- Get students to change the text about
Ba and write about themselves


<b> a. When it’s hot, I ………</b>
<b> When it’s hot, I ………</b>
<i> When it’s hot, I ………</i>
<i> When it’s hot, I ………</i>
<i> b. When it’s hot, he / she ………</i>
<b> When it’s hot, he / she ……… </b>
<i> When it’s hot, he / she ……… </i>
<i> When it’s hot, he / she ………</i>
<b>5.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn seasons
vocabulary and how to talk about their
favorite activities in different weather.
- Have them prepare Unit 13 – L4- B1<i>: </i>
<i>Adverbs of frequency, Presnt simple………. </i>


- Students change the text about Ba
and write about themselves


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests


*T’s evaluation:



...
...
...


<i> </i> <i> </i>


Teaching date: .3.09


<i> </i><b>UNIT 13: Activities and the seasons</b>
<b> Lesson 4/81: B1- Activities in the seasons</b>
<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to practice in adverds of frequency, simple
present tense and sports vocabulary. .


<b>B. Teaching aids:</b>


text book
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking and writing
<b>D.Proceduces:</b>


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Revision:</b>


<b>Matching</b>



- Write adverbs of frequency and signs on
the board.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

- usually vvvv
- often x
- sometimes vvv
- never v


- Get students to come up to the board then
match items in the left with items in the
rihgt.


<b>2 .Presentation: </b>
* Vocabulary:


<b> - to play basketball: ch¬i bãng chun</b>
- to go sailing: đi bơi thuyền


<b>Presentation pictures</b>
- Show the picture and ask students :
+ What do they do in the in the spring?
<i> - They often play volleyball in the </i>
<i> spring.</i>


<i>- What do you do in the spring?</i>
<b>+ Target language: </b>


<b> </b><i> <b>-What+do /does+S+ do+ in + </b><b>………</b><b>.?</b></i>
<i><b> - S + Adverbs + V + </b><b>………</b><b>. </b></i>



- Let students copy the notes in their
notebooks and memorize.


<b>3. Practice:</b>


<b>Answer given</b>
- Put the sentences on the board.


<b> We often go fishing in the fall. </b>
They usually play volleyball in the
winter.


She sometimes flies a kite in the
spring.


He never reads books in the summer.
- Get students to ask questions and answer.
+What do you do in the fall?


<i> + We often go fishing. </i>


- Do the same for the second cue.
<b>4. Further practice:</b>


<b>Lucky numbers</b>
- Write the numbers on the board.


<b> 1 2 3 4 5 </b>
<b>6 </b>



<b> 7 8 9 10 11 </b>
<b>12 </b>


<b>1What s the weather like in the winter?</b><i>‘</i>
<b>2.What do you usually do in the fall?</b>
<b>3What do you usually eat in the winter?</b>
<b>5What s the weather like in the spring?</b>’
<b>7Where do you usually do in the sum</b><i>…?</i>
<b>10What s the weather like in the fall?</b>’
<b> 4 - 6 - 8 - 9 - 11 - 12 : Lucky numbers </b>
<b>5.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn seasons vocabulary
and how to talk about they often do in
seasons.


- Have them prepare Unit 13


L5-- Come up to the board then match
items in the left with items in the
right.


- Look at the picture and say the words
in English.


- Answer the teacher’s question


+ They often play volleyball in the spring.



- copy the notes in the notebooks and
memorize.


- Read the sentences.


- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the questions .


- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.


- Look at the board.


- Work in teams.


- Take turn to choose the numbers.
- Listen to the teacher carefully.
- Answer the questions.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

B2:Writing about activities you do in
<i>different seasons. </i>


*T’s evaluation:


...
...



Teaching date: .3.09


<i> </i><b>UNIT 13: Activities and the seasons</b>
<b> Lesson 5/82: B2- Activities in the seasons</b>
<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to Write about activities they do in
different seasons


<b>B. Teaching aids: text book </b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice writing
<b>D.Proceduces:</b>


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Warm up:</b>


<b>Networks</b>


- Write a network on the board and put
some more words below it.


<b> Watch TV go fishing</b>
<i>read books Seasons</i>


<i> winter summer</i>


<i> go jogging </i>


<i>do earobics have a picnic </i>
- Get students to think of activities they do
in seasons.


- Get students to put the given words in the
appropriate circles


<b>2.Pre writing: </b>


<b>Survey</b>


- Have them tell about themselves and talk
to their friends about their activities.


<i><b>Name</b></i> <i><b>Sea- </b><b> </b></i>
<i><b>son</b></i>


<i><b></b></i>


<i><b>Wea-ther</b></i> <i><b>Usual</b><b>-ly go</b></i> <i><b>Usaul</b><b>-ly do</b></i>
<i><b>Usual</b></i>
<i><b>-ly eat</b></i>
<i><b>/ drink</b></i>


<i>Hoai</i> <i>Fall</i> <i>Cool</i> <i>the </i>


<i>mou</i> <i>go cam</i> <i>a picni</i>



- Students to think of the activities


- Go to the board and fill in the remaining
empty circles with their own words.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>

<i>p</i> <i>hot </i>
<i>drink</i>


- Let them practice with their partners:
+ Which season do you like?


<i> + Fall.</i>


<i> + What s the weather like in the fall?</i>’
<i> + It s cool.</i>’


<i> + Where do you usually go?</i>
<i> + to the mountain</i>


<i> + What do you usually do there?</i>
<i>+ I go camping with my friends</i>
<i> + What do you usually eat or drink?</i>
<i> + We usually take a picnic and a lot of</i>
<i>hot drink.</i>


<b>3. While writing:</b>


<b>Write it up</b>


- Ask Students to write about the friends


they have interviewed using 3rd <sub>person</sub>
singular.


<i><b> Hoai likes the fall, when the weather is </b></i>
<i>cool. She usually goes camping in the </i>
<i>mountain with their friends. They take a </i>
<i>picnic and a lot of hot drink. </i>


<b>4. Post writing</b>


- Correct their writings.


- Choose some writing and correct on the
board


<b>5.Homework</b>


- Ask students to write their activities in
their notebook.


- Have them do exercises in the workbook
from page 106 to 111 prepare Unit 14 –
L1- A1-3: Going to future. “ ”


- Practice with partners.


- Tell the teacher what they have asked their
partner, e.g.“<i>Hoai swims. She plays</i>
<i>volleyball and table tennis………”</i>



- Students write about the friends they
have interviewed using 3rd <sub>person singular.</sub>


- Write individually
- Share their writings.
- Write some on the board.


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests.
*T’s evaluation:


...
...
...
Teaching date: .3.09


<i> </i><b>UNIT 14:</b>

<b> </b>

<b>MAKING PLANS</b>


<b> Lesson 1/83: A1-3 -VACATION DESTINATIONS</b>


<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “Going to” to talk about vacation
plans .


<b>B. Teaching aids: text book and catsette</b>
<b>C. Methods: Practice speaking </b>
<b>D.Proceduces:</b>



<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Warm up: Chatting</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

activities in seasons.


<b> - What do you do in the spring?</b>
- Do you usually go camping?
- Where do you often go ?
<b>2 .Presentation: </b>


* Vocabulary:


<b> - The summer vacation: k× nghØ hÌ</b>
- The citadel:thµnh néi.


- to stay with someone: ë víi ai………
- Uncle:chó ,b¸c.


- Aunt: cô, gì


- to visit: thăm , tham quan
+ checking ;


<b>Rub out and remember</b>


-Point to the Vietnamese translations and
rub out English words.


- Get students to call the English words.


<b>Presentation dialogue</b>


- Show students the dialogue.
- Let them listen to the tape.


- Ask them to play the roles of Ba and Lan.
- Ask students to isolate the model sentence
by Asking them some questions;


+ What is Ba going to do this summer
<i>vacation?</i>


<i> + I am going to visit Hue.</i>
<i> + Where is he going to stay?</i>


<i> + He is going to stay with his aunt nad </i>
<i>uncle. </i>


<i><b>Form:</b></i>


<i><b>- Wh + be + S + going to + V</b><b>…………</b><b>?</b></i>
<i><b> - S + be + going to + V</b></i>


<b>3. Practice: Answer given</b>
- Put the sentences on the board.
<b> * I am going to visit Hue. </b>


<i> * I am going to stay with my aunt </i>
<i> and uncle. </i>



<i> * I am going to stay there for a week. </i>
<i> *- I am going to visit the citadel</i>


- Get students to ask questions and answer.
+What are you going to do ?


<i> + I am going to visit Hue. </i>


- Do the same for the second cue.
<b>4.Further practice:</b>


<b>Mapped dialogue</b>


- Put the dialogue on the board which is
only words. The words are cues.


- Model the dialogue.


<b>- Run through the cues like a drill with</b>
<b>the whole class.</b>


<i><b> Lan</b></i>


<i><b> </b></i>

<i><b> Mai</b><b>  </b></i>


- Answer the teacher’s questions about
their activities.


- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.



- Notice the main stress pattern.


-Write the new words in their notebooks
- Students repeat chorally and remember all
the English words.


- Call the English words and write the
English words if there is time


-listen to the T.
-listen to the tape


- play the roles of Ba and Lan.
- answer the questions.


- copy the form


<i><b>Form:</b></i>


<i><b>- Wh + be + S + going to + V</b><b>…………</b><b>?</b></i>
<i><b> - S + be + going to + V</b></i>


- Read the sentences.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the questions .


- Practice in pairs.



- Some pairs practice in front.


- Look at the board and listen to the
teacher.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

-What / S.Vac?
- Where / stay?
- How long?
-What / do ?
- HCM city.


Ha Long Bay.
a hotel.


2 weeks.


Visit / beach /
swim. And you?
<b>5.Homework</b>


- Ask students to learn vocabulary and how
to talk about vacation plans.


- Have them prepare Unit 14


-A4-5:Reading a text and sequencing words:
<i>first, then, next, after that and finally. </i>


- Rewrite the dialogue



- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests


*T’s evaluation:


...
...
...
.


Teaching date: .3.09
<i> UNIT 14:</i>

<b> </b>

<b>MAKING PLANS</b>


<b> Lesson 2/84: A4-5 -VACATION DESTINATIONS</b>


<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read a text about vacation plans to
understand the details and practice “ going to” future and sequencing words: first, then,
next, after that and finally.


<b>B. Teaching aids: text book </b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice reading comprehension.
<b>D.Proceduces:</b>



<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’


<b>1. Warm up: Chatting</b>


- Ask students some questions about their
activities in seasons.


- Teacher – whole class.


<b> </b>- What’s the weather like?
- What weather do you like?


- What are you going to do this summer
vacation ?


<b>2 .Pre - reading:</b>
<b> Vocabulary:</b>


<b> - The beach : bãi biển</b>
- a temple : đền miếu.
- first (adv) :trớc tiên


- Then (adv) : kế đó , tiếp theo
<b>Rub out and remember</b>


-Point to the Vietnamese translations and
rub out English words.


- Get students to call the English words.



- Answer the teacher’s questions about
their activities.


- Students – Teacher


- Listen to teacher .


- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the Vietnamese translation.
- Copy in their notebook


- Students repeat chorally and remember all
the English words.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

<b>Ordering</b>


- Set the sence: Phuong and Mai are going
to visit the five places. Can you guess
where they are going to visit fisrt, then ,
next, after that and finally?


- Nha Trang
- HCM city
- Ha Noi
- Ha Long Bay
- Hue


<b>2.While reading: </b>



- <i>First: Ha Long Bay.</i>
<i> - Then: Ha Noi.</i>
<i> -Next: Hue</i>


<i> - After that: Nha Trang.</i>
<i>- Finally: Ho Chi Minh City</i>


<b>Grid</b>
- Put the table on the board.


<i><b>Places</b></i> <i><b>Where</b></i> <i><b>How</b><b><sub>long</sub></b></i> <i><b>What</b></i>


<i>Ha Long</i> <i>with uncle<sub>& aunt </sub></i> <i>2 days</i> <i><sub>Long Bay </sub>visit Ha</i>


<i>Ha Noi</i> <i>hotel</i> <i>3 days</i> <i>see NgocSon</i>
<i>Temple</i>
<i>Hue</i> <i><sub>friends</sub>with</i> <i>2 days</i> <i><sub>citadel </sub>see the</i>


<i>Nha</i>


<i>Trang</i> <i>friend shouse</i>’ <i>3 days</i>


<i>Go to Nha</i>
<i>Trang</i>
<i>Beach</i>
<i>HCM</i>


<i>City</i> <i>parent sgrand-</i>’ <i>one week</i>


<i>Visit</i>


<i></i>
<i>grand-parents</i>
- Get students to reread the text then


complete the table.


- Get students to share the answers with
their partners.


<b>Answer given</b>


- Ask students to ask questions and answer:
+ Where are they going to visit?


<i> + They are going to visit Ha Long Bay</i>
<i> + Where are they going to stay?</i>


<i> + They are going to stay with their</i>
<i>uncle and aunt.</i>


<b>4.Post reading</b>


<b>Transformation writing</b>


- Have students use the same grid
headings but this time fill it with their
own plans for the summer vacation.


- Listen to the teacher.



- Guess where they are going to visit
fisrt, then , next, after that and finally.


- Get students to read the text and check.
- Read the table on the board.


- Read the text again and complete the
table.


- Share their answer with their partners.


- Ask and answer the questions.
- Work in pairs.


- Fill it with their own plans for the
summer vacation.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

<b>5.Homework</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart
vocabulary and Sequencing words.


- Have them prepare Unit 14 - Lesson 3:


<i>(B1-4) : Asking about others’ projects</i>


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher requests


*T’s evaluation:



...
...
...
...
Teaching date: .3.09
<i> UNIT 14:</i>

<b> </b>

<b>MAKING PLANS</b>


<b> Lesson 3/85: B1-4 - FREE TIME PLANS</b>
<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to practice speaking with “ Going to” to
talk about plans for the near future.


<b>B. Teaching aids: text book and catsette</b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking.
<b>D.Proceduces:</b>


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Warm up:</b>


<b>Finding friends</b>
- Put a table on the board.


<i><b>H</b></i>
<i><b>w</b></i>



<i><b>M.</b></i>
<i><b>F</b></i>


<i><b>S.</b></i>
<i><b>M</b></i>


<i><b>M</b></i>
<i><b>v</b></i>


<i><b>B</b></i>


<i><b>m</b></i> <i><b>M</b></i>


<i><b>W</b></i>
<i><b>k</b></i>


<i><b>see</b></i> <i><b><sub>v</sub></b></i> <i><b><sub>v</sub></b></i> <i><b><sub>v</sub></b></i> <i><b><sub>v</sub></b></i>


<i><b>pla</b></i> <i><b><sub>v</sub></b></i>


<i><b>do</b></i> <i><b><sub>v</sub></b></i>


<i><b>vis</b></i> <i><b><sub>v</sub></b></i> <i><b><sub>v</sub></b></i>


<i><b>hel</b></i> <i><b><sub>v</sub></b></i> <i><b><sub>v</sub></b></i>


<i><b>go</b></i> <i><b><sub>v</sub></b></i>


<i><b>wa</b></i> <i><b><sub>v</sub></b></i> <i><b><sub>v</sub></b></i>



-Ask students to work in groups


-Ask them to match the verbs with the
nouns to make phrases.


+ See my friend.
<b>Board drill</b>


- Get students to use finding friend as cues
to ask questions and answer.


+ What are you going to do tomorrow?
<i>+ I m going to do my homework</i>’


<b>2 .Pre speaking: </b>


<b>Predict dialogue</b>
- Set the scene:


Lan and Tuan are talking about their
<i>near future plans </i>


- Put the dialogue on the board. Some of
the words are missing.


- Look at the board.


- Students work in groups



- Match the verbs with the nouns to
make phrases.


- Work in pairs.


-Ask questions and answer.


- Listen to the teacher.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

<i><b>Tuan: What are you going to do tonight?</b></i>
<i><b>Lan: I m going to (1) _________ .</b></i>’


<i><b>Tuan: What are you going to do </b></i>
<i>tomorrow?</i>


<i><b>Lan: </b>It s Sunday. I m going to (2)_____. Then we</i>’ ’
<i>are going to (3)______. What about you? </i>


<i><b>Tuan : Tonight, I m going to (4) _____ .</b></i>’
<i>Tomorrow I m going to (5)______ .</i>’


- Ask students to guess what the missing
words are.


+ What is Lan / Tuan going to do to
<i>tonight / tomorrow?</i>


<b>3.While speaking: </b>


- Get students to read the dialogue (B1,


page 144) and check.


<b> - Lan: Tonight- do homework.</b>
<i> Tomorrow- visit-see a movie.</i>
<i> - Tuan: Tonight- play badminton.</i>


<i> Tomorrow- watch a soccer </i>
<i>match.</i>


<b>Substitution drill- B2 </b>–<b>page 144</b>
<b> a) tonight: see a movie</b>


tomorrow: go walking
b) tonight: help my mom
tomorrow: play volleyball


<b>Mapped dialogue- B4 – page 144</b>
<i><b> Nga</b></i>


<i><b> </b></i>

<i><b> Ba</b><b>  </b></i>
<i>What/weekend</i>


<i>? </i>


<i>Which/theater?</i>
<i>What / see?</i>
<i>It/ good movie?</i>


<i> see a movie </i>
<i> Sao Mai.</i>



<i>Jurassic</i>
<i>Park. </i>


<i> I / not / know</i>


<b>4.Post speaking: Chain game</b>


- Write the phrases on the board.


<i> On Saturday morning, I’m going to…</i>
<i> On Saturday afternoon, I’m going to… </i>
<i> On Saturday evening, I’m going to…</i>
<i> On Sunday morning, ………</i>
<i> On Sunday afternoon, ………</i>
<i> On Sunday evening, ………</i>


- Ask students to get into groups of four
or five.


- Do the model.


<b>5.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart activities
and “Be going to” to talk about the near
future.


- Have them prepare Unit 14 - Lesson 4:



<i>(B5-6) : Further listening and reading </i>
<i>pracftice with “Going to”.</i>


- Read the dialogue.


- Guess what the missing words are.
- Students give their predictions.
+ He / She is going to ………
-Read the dialogue and check.


- Lis ten to the teacher.
- Practice with partners.


- Correct the exercises and write in the
notebooks.


- Look at the board and listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.


- Practice the dialogue in pairs .
- Some pairs practice in front.
- Rewrite the dialogue


- Look at the board


- Get into groups of four or five.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Play games.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

*T’s evaluation:


...
...
...


<i> </i>


Teaching date: .3.09
<i> UNIT 14:</i>

<b> </b>

<b>MAKING PLANS</b>


<b> Lesson 4/86: B5-6 - FREE TIME PLANS</b>
<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to Further reading and listening practice
with “going to”.


<b>B. Teaching aids: poster and catsette</b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice reading and listening.
<b>D.Proceduces:</b>


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Warm up :</b>


<b>Survey</b>



- Have them tell about themselves and talk
to their friends about their activities.


<i><b></b></i>
<i><b>to-night</b></i>


<i><b>on</b></i>
<i><b></b></i>


<i><b>Satur-day?</b></i>


<i><b>on</b></i>
<i><b></b></i>


<i><b>Sun-day</b></i>


<i><b>in the</b></i>
<i><b>sum</b></i>
<i><b>mer</b></i>
<i><b></b></i>


<i><b>vaca-tion</b></i>
<i><b>Me</b></i> <i>do </i>


<i></i>
<i>home-work</i>


<i><b></b></i>
<i><b>Part-ner 1</b></i>
<i><b></b></i>


<i><b>Part-ner 2</b></i>


- Let them practice with their partners:
+ What are you going to do tonight?
<i> + I m going to do my homework.</i>’
<b>2a .Pre reading: </b>


<b> * Vocabulary:</b>
<b> - to bring: mang</b>
- a camera: máy ảnh


- to take a photo: chơp ¶nh
<b>-Pre Questions</b>


- Set the sence: Minh and his friends are
<i>going to have a picnic.Read the questions </i>
<i>and answer.</i>


- Try to tell about their activities and ask
their friends about theirs.


- Practice with partners.


- Tell the teacher what they have asked
their partner, e.g:<i> Nam is going see his friend </i>
<i>tonight. He s going to have a picnic on Saturday. </i>’


<i>On Sun day, He s going to play volleyball. He s </i>’ ’


<i>going to visit Ha Noi in the summer vacation.</i>



- Listen to teacher .


- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the Vietnamese translation.
- Copy in their notebook.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

<i>Where are they going to visit?</i>


<i>What three things are they going to bring?</i>
<i> What are they going to take there?</i>


<b>3a.While reading: </b>


- Get students to check their predicted
answers.


<b> </b>


<b>2b .Pre listening: Brainstorm</b>


- Set up the sence: Vui and her four friends
<i>are planning a camping. Guess what they </i>
<i>are going to bring. </i>


<i> warm clothes</i>
<i> drink a tent</i>
<b> </b>



<b> things to bring</b>
<i>a kite</i>


<i> food</i>
- Ask students to think of


things they are going to bring.


- Get them to go to the board and write
down their ideas.


<b>3b.While Listening: B6 </b>–<b> page 145</b>
-Let students lissten to the tape and check
their predictions


<b>4. Further practice:</b>


<b>Lucky numbers</b>
- Write the numbers on the board.


<b>1 2 3 4 5 </b>
<b>6 </b>


<b> 7 8 9 10 11 </b>
<b>12 </b>


<b>1</b><i>Name two people who / bring cameras</i>


<b>2</b><i>Name two people who / bring food.</i>



<b>4 </b><i>Where is the boy s picnic going to be?</i>’
<b>6 </b><i>Where are the girls going to go ca…?</i>


<b>7</b><i>Name three people who / some drinks.</i>


<b>8</b><i>What s Lan going to bring?</i>’
<b>10</b><i>Who s going to bring a tent?</i>’


<b>11</b><i>How many days are the girls /camp?</i>
<b>3 </b>–<b> 5 </b>–<b> 9 </b>–<b> 12 : </b><i><b>Lucky numbers</b></i>
<b>5.Homework</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart activities
and “Be going to” to talk about the near
future.


- Have them prepare Unit 14 -


SUGGESTIONS (C1-3)


- Students check their predicted
answers.


- near a lake - take photos
<i> - a camera, food and drink</i>
- Listen to the teacher.


- Students to think of things Vui and her
friends are going to bring.



- Go to the board and write down their
idea.


- Students listen to the tape and check their
predictions


<i>- Vui: a tent, some food </i>–<i><b>Lan: a ball</b></i>
<i>- Ly: a camera </i>–<i><b>Mai&Nga: some drink</b></i>


- Look at the board.


- Work in teams.


- Take turn to choose the numbers.
- Listen to the teacher carefully.


- Answer the questions
- Take notes and memorize


- Do home as the teacher requests


 T’s evaluation :


<i>...</i>
<i>...</i>
<i>...</i>






Teaching date: : .3.09


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to make suggestions with “Let’s……….”
and responding; further practice in “want to (do) <i>….</i>.


<b>B. Teaching aids: text book and catsette</b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice listening and speaking.
<b>D.Proceduces:</b>


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1 .Warm up: Brainstorm</b>


- Ask students to tell the names of the
intresting places in Viet Nam which they’d
like to visit during summer vocation.


<i> </i>
<b> </b>


<b> </b><i><b>Intersting places in VN</b></i>


<i>Ha Long</i>


<i> Da lat</i>


- Get them to go to the board and write


down their ideas.


<b>2 .Presentation: </b>
* Vocabulary:
<b> - a pagoda:chïa</b>
- by bus:b»ng xe buýt
- too # very:rÊt


- too far: qu¸ xa


<b>Rub out and remember</b>


-Point to the Vietnamese translations and
rub out English words.


- Get students to call the English words.
<b>Pre Questions</b>


- Set the sence: Ba, Lan and their friends
<i>are going to go an interesting place in the </i>
<i>vacation. Let answer the two questions </i>
<i>below.</i>


Where are they going to go?
How are they going to travel?


<b>Presentation dialogue</b>


- Show students the dialogue. - C1 on
page 147



- Ask them to play the roles of Ba and Lan.
- Ask students to answer the questions.
<b>Reading comprehension</b>


<i><b>a) going to Hue. e) By bike.</b></i>
<i><b>b)</b></i> <i>go to huong pagoda.</i>


<i><b>c) Walk there f) It s too hot.</b></i>’
<i><b>d) It s too far. </b></i>’ <i><b> g) By minibus.</b></i>


- Ask students to isolate the model
sentence by Asking them some questions;
<i><b>Form:</b></i>


<i><b> Let s + Vinf</b><b>’</b></i>


<i><b> - Why don t we + Ving</b><b>’</b></i> <i><b>…………</b><b>?</b></i>
<i><b> - What about- + Ving</b><b>………</b><b>.?</b></i>
<i><b> - Yes, let s / That s a good idea / </b><b>’</b></i> <i><b>’</b></i>
<i><b> Yes. Good idea / No, Let s not.</b><b>’</b></i>


<b>3. Practice:</b>


<b> - C3 on page 148-149:</b>
<b>Picture drill</b>


- Listen to the teacher.


- Tell the names of the interesting places in


Viet Nam.


- Go to the board and write down their idea


- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.
- Students repeat chorally and remember all
the English words.


- Call the English words and write the
English words if there is time


- listen to the T
- anser the questions.


- Students read the dialogue in C1 on
page 147 in pairs


- role play


- answer the questions.


- copy the forms and use.


<i><b> Let s + Vinf</b><b>’</b></i>



<i><b> - Why don t we + Ving</b><b>’</b></i> <i><b>…………</b><b>?</b></i>
<i><b> - What about- + Ving</b><b>………</b><b>.?</b></i>
<i><b> - Yes, let s / That s a good idea / </b><b>’</b></i> <i><b>’</b></i>
<i><b> Yes. Good idea / No, Let s not</b><b>’</b></i>


<i>- chóng ta h·y/ T¹i sao chóng ta </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

- Run through the pictures.
<b> a) go swimming</b>
b) go to the musium
c) play volleyball
d) go to the zoo
e) play badminton
f) go camping


- Hold up the first picture and say the
model sentences:


<i>+Let s go swimming.</i>’
<i>+ Yes, let s.</i>’


- Do the same for the seccond picture.
<b>4.Further practice: Mapped dialogue</b>
- Put the dialogue on the board which is
only words. The words are cues.


<i><b> You</b></i>


<i><b> </b></i>

<i><b> Your friend </b><b>  </b></i>
-see a movie.


- no… too hot.
museum


no / go by mini
-bus


X / beach


Yes / walk.
Yes.
- Model the dialogue.


- Run through the cues like a drill with the
whole class.


<b>5.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn vocabulary and
how to talk about vacation plans.


- <i>Nói lời đề nghị làm việc gì</i>


- Look at the pictures.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.



- Some pairs practice in front.


- Look at the board and listen to the teacher.


- Repeat after the teacher.
- Practice the dialogue in pair .
- Some pairs practice in front.
- Rewrite the dialogue


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests.
Teaching date: : . .09


<i> UNIT 14:</i>

<b> </b>

<b>MAKING PLANS</b>
<b> Lesson 6/88: GRAMMAR PRACTICE</b>
<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to Further practice in Present simple,
Adverb of frequency, Present progressive, “ Going to” future, the weather.


<b>B. Teaching aids: text book </b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking and writing.
D. Procedure:


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’


<b>1.Present simple tense: </b>


<b>Survey</b>


- Have them tell about themselves and talk
to their friends about their favorite sports.


<i><b>Name</b></i> <i><b>V like</b><b><sub>like</sub></b></i> <i><b>……</b><b> X </b><b>……</b><b> don t </b><b>’</b></i>
<i><b>Sports</b></i> <i><b>Sea-son</b></i> <i><b>Food</b></i> <i><b>Drink</b></i>
<i><b>1. Ha</b></i> <i></i>


<i>Foot-ball x</i>
<i></i>
<i>swim-ming x</i>


<i><b>2.</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

<i><b>3.</b></i>


- Let them practice with their partners:
+ What sports do you like?


<i> + Football. </i>


<i> + What sports don t you like?’</i>
<i> + Swimming.</i>


Write it up


- Ask Students to write about the friends


they have interviewed using 3rd <sub>person</sub>
singular.


<b>2.. Adverbs of frequency:</b>
<b>Slap the board</b>


- Call two students of two teams to the
front of the class.


- Call out one of English words in loud
voice.


<b>Nought and crosses</b>
- Put the grid on the board.


- Divide class into teams. One is noughts
(O) and the other is Crosses (X).


- Two teams choose any words in the boxes
and ask questions about feelings .


<i><b>TV?</b></i> <i><b>the movies?</b></i> <i><b>the store?</b></i>


<i><b>swimming?</b></i> <i><b>your mom?</b></i> <i><b>fishing?</b></i>


<i><b>table tennis?</b></i> <i><b>camping?</b></i> <i><b>Badmin-ton?</b></i>


<b>3. Present Progressive:</b>
<b>Word cue drill</b>
- Run through the cues.



- Hold up the first cues and say the model
sentences.


<i>- Today, Hung s on vacation.’</i>
<i> + Hung usually gets up at 6.</i>


<i> + That s right, but today he s ’</i> <i>’</i> <i>getting up</i>
<i>at 7</i>


<b> - get up at 6 / get up at 7 </b>
- go to school / go camping
- study / not study


- have rice for lunch / have a picnic
- walk home / walk in the mountain
<b>4. Future (Going to): </b>


<b>Picture drill</b>
- Run through the pictures.


- Hold up the first picture and say the
model sentences:


<i>+What are they going to do?</i>
<i>+ They re going to play soccer’</i>
<b> a) play soccer</b>


b) play tennis
c) go camping


d) go swimming


- Practice with partners.


- Tell the teacher what they have asked
their partner, e.g: Ha likes football but he
<i>doesn t like swimming’</i> <i>………?</i>


<i> </i>


- Students write about the friends they
have interviewed sing 3rd <sub>person singular.</sub>
- Write individually


- play the game.


- Say the Vietnamese translation .


- Run forward and slap the correct words on
the board.


- Look at the board.
- Work in groups.


- One is noughts (O) and the other is
Crosses (X).


- Choose any words in the boxes, ask and
ask questions about frequency:



<i>+How often do you go to the movies?</i>
<i>+Twice a year.</i>


- Look at the cues.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.


- Look at the pictures.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

e) watch TV
f) cook
<b>5 .Future plans:</b>


<b>Find someone who</b>
- Put the table on the board.
- Get students to get into groups.


<i><b>Name</b></i>


<i><b>What are you going to</b></i>


<i><b>do</b><b>……</b><b>..?</b></i>


<i>This</i>


<i>eve</i> <i>tomor-row</i> <i>Week-end</i> <i>Vaca-tion</i>


<i>Mai</i> <i>watch</i>


<i>TV</i> <i>do</i>
<i>home-work</i>


<i>have</i>


<i>a pic..</i> <i>visitHue</i>


- Get students to ask each other questions.
+ Teacher: What are you going to do this
<i>evening?</i>


+ Student (Mai): I m going to watch<i>’</i>


<i>TV………..</i>


<b>3.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to review vocabulary and
Grammar points (Unit12 – Unit14) and
exercises in the exercise book from Unit
12 to Unit 14 .



- Have them prepare FORTY-FIVE
<i>MINUTE TEST .</i>


- Look at the board.
- Work in groups.


- Stand up and ask each orther questions.
When they find someone who says “Yes”
they fill in the name. They can’t fill in
someone’s name more than once.


- Tell the teacher what they have found
- Review vocabulary and Grammar points
(Unit12 – Unit14) and exercises in the
exercise book from Unit 12 to Unit 14 .
- Prepare FORTY-FIVE MINUTE TEST.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>



Class:___________________ Test on English
Name:__________________ Time: 45 minutes.
--- oOo---
<b>I/ Match the words in column A with the words in column B: (1 mark)</b>


<b>A</b> <b>B</b>


spring
summer
fall
winter



cool
warm
hot
cold


<b>II/ Choose the correct word to compete the sentences: (3 marks)</b>


1/ _________ you like sports? a. Do b. Does c. Are
2/ When you go camping, you must have a ___________. a. stove b. tent c. camera
3/ How often does Ly go jogging? __________ a week. a. one b. once c. two
4/ I am going ___________ Ha Noi. a. visiting b. visit c. to visit
5/ We can see Ngoc Son Temple in __________. a. Ha Noi b. Hue c. HCM city
6/ They play sports three times a week. They __________ play sports.


a. always b. often c. never


<b>III/ Fill in each blank with one word from the box: (1,5 marks) </b>
<i><b> visit hotel week vacation How long</b></i>
<i><b>where </b></i>


Ba: What are you going to do in the _____________?
Lan: I am going to ___________ Hue.


Ba: __________ are you going to stay?


Lan: I am going to stay in a ______________.
Ba: __________ are you going to stay?


Lan: I am going to stay for a _______________.



<b>IV/ Read the passage and answer the questions: (2 marks)</b>


Nam likes sports. On the weekend, he often plays badminton in the yard. He usually plays with
three friends. They always take water and beautiful rackets. Nam sometimes plays tennis, but he
never plays soccer.


<i><b> * Questions:</b></i>


1/ What does Nam like? ___________________________________________________


2/ When does he play badminton? ___________________________________________________
3/ Does Nam play tennis? ___________________________________________________
4/ Does Nam play soccer?


___________________________________________________
<b>V/ Give the correct tense of the verbs: (1 mark)</b>


1/ She /usually /play / badminton / fall.
2/ They / watch / TV / tonight.


3/ what about / liten music?


<b>VI/ Write the answers about you: (1,5 marks)</b>
1/ What do you do in your free time?


_______________________________________________________
2/ What weather do you like?


_______________________________________________________


3/ What are you going to do this summer vacation?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>



Teaching date: : .4.09
<i> UNIT 15:</i>

<b> </b>

<b>COUNTRIES</b>

<b> </b>



<b> Lesson 1/90: WE ARE THE WORLD (A1- A4)</b>
<b> </b>


<i> A. Aim: </i>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce their nationality and
language and ask others about these


<b>B. Teaching aids: text book , poster and c¸tette</b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking and writing.
D. Procedures:


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>I. warmer:</b>


Matching


-Ask students to think of some country
names .


- Get them to go to the board and write


down their ideas.


- Give feedback.
<b>2 .Presentation: </b>
* Vocabulary:
<b> - the world:thÕ giíi</b>
- a country:quèc gia
- a nationality:qc tÞch
- to speak: nỉi tiÕng


-Canada/France/China/theUSA/Japan
/Great Britain/Australia/Viet Nam


<b>Slap the board</b>


- Put the Vietnamese translation on the
board.


- Call two students of two teams to the
front of the class.


- Call out one of English words in loud
voice.


<b>Presenation Text </b>


- Let students to listen to the cassette and
repeat.


- Introduce oneself and others:



+ I m ’ <i>(teacher s name)</i>’ <i>. I m from </i>’ <i>Viet</i>
<i>Nam . And this is John. He s from the</i>‘
<i>USA.</i>


<b>+ Target language: </b>


- Ask some students some questions and to
introduce the Wh-question “Where is ……
from?” and the answer “He / She’s from


”.


…………


- Point to the questions and answer to get
students to isolate the model sentences .
<i><b>- Where is / are + S + from?</b></i>


<i><b> - S + am / is / are + from + tªn nøoc</b></i>
<b>3 .Practice:</b>


<b>Nought and crosses</b>
- Put the grid on the board.


- Listen to the teacher.


- Students to think of some coutry names.
- Go to the board and write down their idea.



- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the main stress pattern.


- Write the new words in their notebooks.


- Say the Vietnamese translation .


- Run forward and slap the correct words on
the board.


- Continue until students have slapped all
the words.


- Listen to the cassette and repeat.
- Pay attention to the teacher.
- Introduce themselves and others .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

- Divide class into teams. One is noughts
(O) and the other is Crosses (X).


- Two teams choose any words in the boxes
and ask questions about county names


<i><b>Laura </b></i> <i><b>Marie </b></i> <i><b>Lee</b></i>


<i><b>John </b></i> <i><b>YOU</b></i> <i><b>Yoko</b></i>



<i><b>Susan </b></i> <i><b>Bruce </b></i> <i><b>Minh </b></i>


- Read the sentences and ask them to listen
attentively.


- Ask them to retell Minh’s introduce.
- Write the them on the board and get
students to isolate the model sentences


<b>Substitution drill</b>


- Let them listen to the cassette and repeat.
<b> + Minh is from Viet Nam. He speaks</b>
<i>Vietnamese.</i>


<i> + Yoko</i>


<b>4.Further practice: A4 </b>–<b> page 156</b>
<b>Mapped dialogue</b>


- Put the dialogue on the board which is only
words. The words are cues.


- Model the dialogue.


<b>- Run through the cues like a drill with the</b>
<b>whole class.</b>


<i><b> Thu</b></i>



<i><b> </b></i>

<i><b> Chi </b><b>  </b></i>
-Who / that?


-Where / from?
-What/nationa- lity
-Which/lang…?


Susan


Great Britain
British.


English
<b>5.Homework:</b>


- learn vocabulary and how to introduce their
nationality and language and ask others about
these.


- Have them prepare Unit 15 – L2- A5<i>: Writing </i>
<i>a postcard about being on vacation. </i>


- Look at the board.


- Work in groups.


- One is noughts (O) and the other is
Crosses (X).


- Choose any words in the boxes, ask and


ask questions about country names :


<i>+ Laura .</i>


<i>+Where s </i>’ <i>Laura from?</i>
<i>+She s from </i>’ <i>Canada. </i>


- Listen to the teacher attentively.


+ My name s Minh. I m from Viet Nam. I ’ ’
<i>speak Vietnamese.</i>


+ Minh is from Viet Nam. He speaks
<i>Vietnamese. </i>


- Write in the form in the notesbooks.
- Listen to the cassette.


+ <i>Minh is from Viet Nam. He speaks Vietnamese.</i>
<i> </i>+ <i>Yoko is from Japan. She speaks Japanese</i>


- Look at the board and listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the teacher.


- Practice the dialogue in pair .


- Some pairs practice in front.
- Rewrite the dialogue


- Take notes and memorize


- Do as the teacher suggests


Teaching date: : .4.09
<i> UNIT 15:</i>

<b> </b>

<b>COUNTRIES</b>

<b> </b>



<b> Lesson 2/91: WE ARE THE WORLD (A5- A6)</b>
<b> </b>


<i> A. Aim: </i>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to Write a postcard about being on vacation
to their friends.


<b>B. Teaching aids: text book , post cards</b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice writing.
D. Procedures:


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’


<b>1. Revision:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>

- Show them pictures of some famous people ans
ask them about their countries and nationalties.
+ <i>Where is he from?</i>


<i> + What s his nationality?</i>’
<b> </b>- Uncle Ho





- Lenin
<b>2 .Pre writing: </b>
<b> * Vocabulary:</b>
<b> </b>- a postcard:bu thiÕp
- wet:Èm ít


- a lot of = many:nhiỊu


- interesting places: nh÷ng nơi thú vị
- to be on vacation: ®ang ®i nghØ


<b>Rub out and remember</b>


-Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub out
English words.


- Get students to call the English words.
<b>- A5 </b>–<b> page 156:</b>


- Show students the postcard.
- Read the postcard aloud.


- Mention the situation when the writer write the
postcard.


- Ask questions to elicit the content of the
postcard.



<b> </b>1. Who’s the postcard from?
2. Where is he?


3. What’s the weather like?
4. Is he traveling by train?


5. What’s he going to do tomorrow?
6. Who’s he the postcard?


7. Where’s he?


<b>Grid</b>


<i>- Explain how to work on the exercise: These are</i>
cities and intersting places of some
countries: Japan, Vietnam, The USA … .
Now work in teams to put them in two
columns


<i><b>Country</b></i> <i><b>City</b></i> <i><b>In .place</b></i>


<i><b>Japan</b></i> <i>Tokyo</i> <i>M Fujiama</i>


<i><b>Vietnam</b></i> <i>Hue</i> <i>Th.Citadel</i>


<i><b>The USA</b></i> <i>New York</i> <i>The Statue of<sub>Liberty</sub></i>


<i><b>China</b></i> <i>Beijing</i> <i>The Great Wall</i>


<i><b>Australia</b></i> <i>Sydney</i> <i>Bondi Beach</i>



<i><b>France</b></i> <i>Paris</i> <i>The Eiffel</i>


<i>Town</i>
<i>+ Where are you ?</i>


<i> +I m in </i>’ <i>Japan.I m visiting </i>’ <i>Tokyo.</i>
<i> +What are you goin to do tomorrow?</i>
<i> + I m going to visit </i>’ <i>M.Fuj..</i>


<b>3.While Writing: A5 - page 156</b>
<b>Transformation Writing</b>
-Divide students into 6 groups


- Group 1: Postcard from Japan
<b> </b>- Group 2: Postcard from Viet Nam
<b> </b>- Group 3: Postcard from The USA


- Look at the pictures.


- Listen to the teacher’s questions and answer about
their countries and nationalities.


+<i> He s from Viet Nam.</i>’


<i> + He s Vietnamese</i>’


- Listen to teacher .
- Repeat after the teacher.



- Notice the Vietnamese translation.
- Copy in their notebook.


- Students repeat chorally and remember all the
English words.


- Call the English words and write the English
words if there is time.


- Look at the postcard shown by the teacher.
- Read the postcard.


- Listen to the teacher’s emphasis.


- Try to answer the questions about the content of
the poatcard


- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat the words aftre the teacher.


- Work in teams to put the words in two columns.


- Use the Grid as cues to ask questions and
answer.


- Work in groups


- Write their postcards in groups.
- Listen attentively



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

<b> </b>- Group 4: Postcard from China
<b> </b>- Group 5: Postcard from Australia
<b> </b>- Group 6: Postcard from France


-Help students write their postcards in groups.
Explain how a postcard is written.


<i>Dear ………,</i>


<i>I m on vacation in London. The weather is </i>’
<b>4.Post writing: Correction</b>


- Ask some students to read their postcards aloud.


<i><b>Suggested postcard</b></i>
<i> Dear Minh,</i>


<i> I m on vcation in </i>’ <i>Beijing . The weather</i>
<i>is cold.</i>


<i> I m traveling by </i>’ <i>car and writing a lot of</i>
<i>interesting places.</i>


<i> Tomorrow, I m giong to visit </i>’ <i>The Great</i>
<i>Wall of Beijing</i>


<i> Love,</i>
<i> Nga</i>



<b>5.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary
and how to write a postcard.


- Have them do exercises on page 124,
125,126 in the workbook and prepare
Unit 15 - Lesson 1: (B1) : Comparative
<i>and Superlative..</i>


- Correct the mistakes if there is any.
- Try to write as many sentences as possible


- Take notes and memorize


- Do homework as the teacher requests


Teaching date: : .4.09
<i> UNIT 15:</i>

<b> </b>

<b>COUNTRIES</b>

<b> </b>



<b> Lesson 3/92: B1-4 </b>
<i> A. Aim: </i>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to compare places using comparative and
superlative adjectives of one syllable.


<b>B. Teaching aids: text book , post cards and catsette</b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking.



<b>D. Procedures</b>:


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Revision: Matching</b>


- Write the words on the board.


- Get students to come up to the board to
match .


<b> hot Hue </b>


HCMC small
wet Hoi An


Sapa
big Hanoi
Long Xuyen cold
2 .Presentation:


<b>Presentation pictures</b>


- Show students the pictures in B1 on page
158, ask them to observe and tell about
each thing.


- Let students observe the three different
adjectives



+ a big building


<i> + a bigger building.</i>
<i> + the biggest building</i>


- Look at the board.
- Work in teams


- Come up to the board then match .
- Check


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

<i> + a small house</i>
<i> + a smaller house</i>
<i> + the smallest house </i>


- Ask them to say what the difference is
and give the formation of the comparative
and superlative form.


* Form:


<i><b>Comparative </b></i>
<i><b> form of </b></i>
<i><b>short </b></i>
<i><b> </b></i>
<i><b>adjectives</b></i>


<i><b>Superlative </b></i>
<i><b> form of </b></i>
<i><b>short </b></i>



<i><b> adjectiv</b></i>
<i><b>es</b></i>


<i><b>Short ADJ +</b></i>


<i><b>ER</b></i> <i><b>The + Short</b><b>ADJ + EST</b></i>
<i>- In the superlative form, the definite </i>
<i>article THE is written before the adjective.</i>
- Let students copy the models and the
formations, and memorize


<b>3. Practice:</b>


<b>Word cue drill</b>
- Run through the cues.


<b> Da Nang / Hanoi / HCMC / big </b>
Vinh / Long Xuyen / Hoi An / small
Hanoi / Can Tho / Hue / wet


Ben Tre / Tra Vinh / Ha Tinh / hot


- Hold up the first cues and say the model
sentences.


<i><b>S1: Hanoi is bigger than Danang</b></i>
<i><b>S2: But HCMC is the biggest.</b></i>
- Do the same for the second cue.
- Correct their mistakes.



<b>4. Further practice:</b>
<b>Ordering</b>


- Set the sence: You are going to read
<i>about some big cities. Can you guess </i>
<i>which is the biggest city in the world? Put </i>
<i>the cities in order: biggest first. </i>


<i>HCMC</i>
<i>LONDON</i>
<i>TOKYO</i>
<i>HANOI</i>
<i>MEXICO CITY</i>


<b>- ask the ss to read B2,3,4 and then answer </b>
the questions:


<b>1 Which is bigger: London or Tokyo?</b>
<b>2 Is Ha Noi bigger than HCMC?</b>
<b>3 Which is taller: Sears Town or </b>
<i>PETRONAS Twin Two?</i>


<b>4 Which is the biggest city in the world?</b>
<i>5. How long is the Great Wall?.</i>


<i>6 How high is the Great Wall?</i>
<i>7. How thick is the Great Wall?</i>


<b>- give the form: S1 + be + short adj </b>–<b>er</b>


<b>than + S2</b>


<b>S + be + the short adj </b>–<b>est + pham vi so</b>
<b>sanh</b>


<b>5.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn vocabulary and
comparative / superlative adjectives.


- Observe and notice the difference of the
phrases given.


- Take notes and learn by heart.


- Look at the cues.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.


- ss guess the order
- give their answer


- read the texts and answer the questions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

- Have them prepare Unit 15 - Lesson 5:


<i>(C1-2) : Lot of ...</i>“ ”


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher suggests


Teaching date: . .09
Lesson 93: Correcting the test


<b>C. Aim :</b>


By the end of the lesson , the ss will be able to realize how well they did the test and
realize their mistakes in doing the test.


<b>D. Teaching aids:</b>
Test papers
<b>C.Methods:</b>


- Having the ss realize their good and bad points in the tests.
-practice writing the test in the notebooks.


D. Proceduces:


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1.Remarks:</b>


- nhìn chung hs nắm đợc lý thuyết và biết
vận dụng kiến thức để làm bài kiểm tra. Vì
thế kết quả khá cao.


- kiến thức trọng tâm : kiểm tra từ vựng và


ngữ pháp trong ba đơn vị bài học13.14,15.
- kỹ năng : trắc nghiệm ngữ pháp và từ
vựng, viết , đọc hiểu


- kiến thức đợc hệ thống và đợc ôn kĩ nên
HS vận dụng làm bài khá tốt.


- Tuy nhiên đối với Hs lớp 6, ý thức học
bài và làm bài của đa số em cha cao , kết
quả còn thấp.


<b>2.Correcting the test:</b>
<b>C©u 1: Matching (1 mark)</b>
spring – warm


winter-cold
summer –hot
fall- cool


<b>C©u2: choose the best answer: (3 marks)</b>
1. do


2. tent
3. once
4. to visit
5. hanoi
6. play


<b>C©u 3:gap fill: ( 1,5 mark)</b>
vacation



visit
where
hotel
how long
week


<b>C©u 4: reading comprehension :( 2marks)</b>
1.Nam likes sports.


2. He plays badminton on the weekend.
3. yes, he does.


4.No, he doesn’t.


<b>Cau IV: complete:(1, mark)</b>


1. she usually plays badminton in the fall.


<b>-listen to the teacher’s remarks.</b>


- copy the answers
<b>C©u 1: Matching (1 mark)</b>
spring – warm


winter-cold
summer –hot
fall- cool


<b>C©u2: choose the best answer: (3 marks)</b>


7. do


8. tent
9. once
10.to visit
11. hanoi
12.play


<b>C©u 3:gap fill: ( 1,5 mark)</b>
vacation


visit
where
hotel
how long
week


<b>C©u 4: </b> reading comprehension:( 2marks)
1.Nam likes sports.


2. He plays badminton on the weekend.
3. yes, he does.


4.No, he doesn’t.


Cau IV: complete:(1, mark)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

2. They are going to watch TV tonight.
<b>Cau V: Write about you :(1,5 mark)</b>
1. I...



2. I like ... weather.
3. I am going to ...
<b> 3. Results:</b>


<b>Líp 6B:</b>


<b> ®iĨm 9,10:...</b>
®iĨm 7,8:...
®iĨm 5,6:...
<b>Líp 6A:</b>


®iĨm 9,10:...
®iĨm 7,8:...
®iĨm 5,6:...
díi 5:...


2. They are going to watch TV tonight.
Cau V: Write about you :(1,5 mark)
1. I...


2. I like ... weather.
3. I am going to ...


<b> - ghi nhí vµ rót kinh nghiƯm cho các bài </b>
kiểm tra lần sau.


<i> </i> Teaching date: : .4.09
<i> UNIT 15:</i>

<b> </b>

<b>COUNTRIES</b>

<b> </b>




<b> Lesson4/94: C1-2 - Natural features</b>
<i> A. Aim: </i>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “A lot of ……..” as a quantifier with
Geography vocabulary to describe Vietnam.


<b>B. Teaching aids: text book , pictures.</b>
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking.
D. Procedures:


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’


<b>1. Revision:</b>


<b>Slap the board</b>


- Put English words on the board.(viet nam’s
features)


- Call two students of two teams to the front of the
class.


- Call out one of the Vietnamese translation in
loud voice.


<b>2 .Pre writing: </b>
<b> * Vocabulary:</b>
<b> </b>- a forest: rõng


- a desert: sam¹c


- a lot of = lots = many:nhiÒu
- great (adj): to lín


<b>Rub out and remember</b>


-Point to the Vietnamese translations and rub out
English words.


- Get students to call the English words.
<b>2 .Presentation: </b>


<b>Presentation text</b>


- Show students the text and let them to the
cassette and repeat.


<b> C1 on page 162 </b>–<b> 163</b>


- Ask some students to read aloud and ask them:
+ <i>What are there 6 natural peatuers Lan tells</i>“


<i>us about?</i>


<b> </b><i> we have lots of rain / the country very green, </i>
<i>we have big forest, a lot of lakes and rivers</i>”
- Ask them to give the formation of “ a lot of..”.


<i><b>LOTS OF / A LOT OF + C . NOUN / </b></i>



<b>Group works.</b>
- Say Enghlish words .


- Run forward and slap the correct words on the
board.


- Continue until students have slapped all the
words.


- Listen to teacher .
- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the Vietnamese translation.
- Copy in their notebook.


- Students repeat chorally and remember all the
English words.


- Call the English words and write the English
words if there is time


- Listen to the cassette and repeat.


- Some students read the text aloud and answer:
+ <i>mountains, rivers, lakes, rain, forests, beaches.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

<i><b> UNC.NOUN.</b></i>


<b>3. Practice: </b>



<b>Picture drill</b>
- Run through the pictures.
<b> a) </b>mountains
<b>b) </b>rivers
<b>c) </b>lakes
<b>d) </b>rain
<b>e) </b>forests
<b>f) </b>beaches
<b>g) </b>deserts


- Hold up the first picture and say the model
sentences:


<i>+Are there lots of mountain in Viet nam?</i>
<i>+ yes, there are.</i>


<b>3. Further practice:</b>


<b>Write it up</b>
- Write the words on the board.
<b> </b>- Lai Chau forests
- Can Tho beaches
- Hai Noi mountains
- Pleiku rice fields
- Da Nang river
- Hue lake


- Quang Ninh rain



<b> </b><i>My country is very beautiful and in teresting. </i>
<i>In Lai Chau there are lots of...</i>


- Get students to come up to the board to match
the cities with natural features .


Get students use the cues to write a passage about
natural features in Viet Nam.


<b>5.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary and
“lots of”


- Have them prepare Unit 15 - Lesson 6: <i> (C- 3) :</i>
<i>Reading a text about the world s great rivers and </i>’


<i>mountains………</i>


- Take notes and learn by heart.


- Look at the pictures.
- Listen to the teacher.


- Repeat it chorally and then individually.
- Make the sentence for themselves.
- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in front.



- Look at the board.
- Work in teams


- Come up to the board then match .
- Check.


- Write a passage about natural features in
Viet Nam.


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher requests.


Teaching date: : .4.09
<i> UNIT 15:</i>

<b> </b>

<b>COUNTRIES</b>

<b> </b>



<b> Lesson 5/95: C3 - cities , building , pªople</b>
<i> A. Aim: </i>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to Read about the world’s great rivers and
mountains to skim for details and get further practice in using comparatives superlatives.
<b>B. Teaching aids: text book , poster</b>


<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice reading comprehension
D. Procedures:


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Revision: Word Square</b>



- Write the word of the square on the
board.


<b>R</b> <b>I</b> <b>V</b> <b>E</b> <b>R</b> <b>S</b> <b>W</b> <b>C</b>


<b>M</b> <b>S</b> <b>T</b> <b>A</b> <b>R</b> <b>T</b> <b>S</b> <b>H</b>


<b>E</b> <b>L</b> <b>B</b> <b>E</b> <b>A</b> <b>C</b> <b>H</b> <b>I</b>


<b>T</b> <b>R</b> <b>E</b> <b>E</b> <b>I</b> <b>G</b> <b>I</b> <b>N</b>


<b>E</b> <b>I</b> <b>R</b> <b>O</b> <b>N</b> <b>E</b> <b>G</b> <b>A</b>


<b>R</b> <b>G</b> <b>L</b> <b>O</b> <b>T</b> <b>S</b> <b>H</b> <b>O</b>


<b>S</b> <b>D</b> <b>L</b> <b>R</b> <b>O</b> <b>W</b> <b>X</b> <b>F</b>


<i> great, long meters, rain, high, China</i>
<i> river, star, beach, tree, lots</i>


<i> world girl</i>


- Tell the students what the topic is and
how many hidden words are there.


<b>2 .Pre - reading:</b>


- Look at the word of the square on the
board.



- Listen to the teacher and answer the
teacher questions.


+ There are 19 hidden workds


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

<b> * Vocabulary:</b>


<b> - to flow to :ch¶y ra</b>
- the sea :biÓn
- Tibet :Tây Tạng


- North Africa : Bắc Phi
<b>* Rub out and remember</b>


-Point to the Vietnamese translations and
rub out English words.


- Get students to call the English words.
<b>* True or False statements</b>


- Set the sence: You are going to read about
some great rivers and mountains in the
world. Now work in pairs and guess about
the text .


<i>1. There are two great river in Viet Nam</i>
<i> 2. The Red River is longer than the </i>
<i>Mekong River.</i>


<i>3. The Red River and the Mekong River </i>


<i>both star in China </i>


<i>4. The longest river in the world is not in </i>
<i>Viet Nam</i>


<i>5. Phanxipang is the highest mountain in </i>
<i>the world</i>


<b>2.While reading: C3 </b>–<b> p 165</b>


- Get students to read the text and check.
<b> 1. T 2. F 3. F 4. T 5. F</b>
<b>* Comprehension questions: C3</b>


- Ask students to read the text carefully
and answer the questions.


<b>Lucky numbers</b>
<b> 1 2 3 4 </b>
<b>5 </b>


<b> 6 7 8 9 </b>
<b>10 </b>


<b>2 Which is the longest river in VN?</b>
<b>3 Where does the Mekong River star?</b>
<b>4 Which is the highest mountain in the </b>
<i>world?</i>


<b>6Which is the longest river in the world?</b>


<b>7Which sea does the Nile River flow to?</b>
<b>8 Which is the highest mountain in the </b>
<i>world?</i>


<b>10 How thick is the Great Wall?</b>
<b>1 - 5 - 9 - 10 : Lucky numbers</b>
<b>4.Post reading: </b>


<b>Speak</b>


- Let some pairs practice asking and
answering about these rivers and
mountains with Wh – questions.


<b> - Wh </b>–<b> Questions:</b><i><b> What, where, </b></i>
<i><b> which, how</b><b>…………</b></i>
<b>5.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary
and forms of the comparatives and
superlatives.


- Listen to teacher .


- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the Vietnamese translation.
- Copy in their notebook.


-Students repeat chorally and remember all


the English words.


- Call the English words and write the
English words if there is time


- Listen to the teacher.


-Guess which is the biggest city in the
world? Put the cities in order: biggest first..


- Read the text and check.


- Read the text carefully and answer the
questions.


- Look at the board.
- Work in teams.


- Take turn to choose the numbers.
- Listen to the teacher carefully.
- Answer the questions.


- Some pairs practice asking and answering
before the class, using Wh – questions.
ex: Which river is the longest in the world?
where is there a lot of rain ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>

- Have them do Exercises from page 127
to 129 in the workbook and prepare Unit
16 –



Lesson 1: (A1&2) : Countable and


<i>uncountable quantifiers</i> - Do homework as the teacher requests


Teaching date: : .4.09
<i> </i>


<i> UNIT 16:</i>

<b> </b>

<b>man and the environment</b>

<b> </b>


<b> Lesson 1/96: A1-3-</b> ANIMALS AND PLANS
<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use Countable and uncountable
quantifiers: a lot, a little, a few to talk about Food.


B. Teaching aids: text book , pictuers and catsette
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice speaking
D. Procedures:


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Revision:</b>


<b> Jumbled words</b>


-Write numbers whose letters are in
disorder.



<b> - toespota = potatoes</b>
- werflos = flowers
- gegs = eggs
- motatoes = tomatoes
- icer = rice
- nonios = onions
- tableveges = vegetables
<b>2. Presentation</b>


<b>Presentation picture</b>


- Use pictures and some real things as
chalk, pens, books, water to identify the
meaning and usage of the quantifiers
<i>some, a few, a little, a lot of. </i>


- Let students listen and repeat : some rice,
<i>a lot of rice, a little rice, some eggs, a lot</i>
<i>of eggs, a few eggs</i>


- Ask them to give the formation of “ a lot
of…………..”.


- Have them take note.


<i><b>* Some / a lot of / a little / a few:</b></i>
<i><b>Some / a lot of / a few + Plural </b></i>
<i><b>Noun</b></i>



<i><b>Some / a lot of / a little + Unc </b></i>
<i><b>Noun</b></i>


<b>3:Reading A2 </b>


<b>. Open prediction</b>


- Set the sence: You are going to read a
text about Mr Hai’s farming. Now work
in pairs and guess about the text .


-Look at the board.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Work in teams.


- Go to the board and write the correct
words. (One word, one student).


- Look at what the teacher show and notice
the meaning as well as the usage of the
quantifiers some, a few, a little, a lot of.
- Listen and repeat


- Take notes and learn by heart.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>

- Ask them to predict 6 things Mr Hai
has on his farm and things they
produces.


Mr Hai has.... they produce. amount...


rice fields


small field
fruit trees
buffalo
cows
chicken


rice


vegetables
fruit


plow + pull
a cart


milk
eggs


a lot of
a few
a few


a little
a lot of
 <b>reading</b> :


- let the ss read the text and chack their
answers.



<b>4.Further practice</b>


<b>Chain game</b>


- use the phrases on the board to write
about Mr Hai:


He has a lot of rice.
He has a few vegetables.
He has a few fruit.


...
...
...
<b>5.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart vocabulary
and Countable and uncountable
quantifiers.


- Have them prepare Unit 16 - Lesson 2:
<i>(A4-5) : Reading a text about the </i>


<i>environment.</i>


- Listen to the teacher.


- copy the table and guess the
information.



- Give their answers.


- read the text and check .
- copy the full table


<i>- write individually.</i>


- Take notes and memorize
- Do as the teacher requests


 T’s evaluation :<i> </i>


...
...
...
...


<i> </i>




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>

<i> </i>


<i> UNIT 16:</i>

<b> </b>

<b>man and the environment</b>

<b> </b>


<b> Lesson 2/97: A4-5-</b> ANIMALS AND PLANS
<i> </i>


<b>A. Aim: </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to Read a text about the Environment to


understand ideas in iterms of cause and effect: “Why …… ?” “Because …” .


B. Teaching aids: text book , poster
<b>C. Methods:</b>


Practice reading and speaking
D. Procedures:


<b> Teacher s activities</b>’ <b> ss activities</b>’
<b>1. Revision : Matching</b>


- Put the Vietnamese translation and
English words on the board.


the population rừng forests
<i><b> tro ng</b>à</i>


<i> the world cánh đo ng farmer à</i>
<i> dân số</i>


<i> to grow con vaät fields </i>
<i> nông dân</i>


<i> food thức ăn animals</i>
<i> thế giới</i>


- Ask students to match English words
with the Vietnamese translation


<b>2 .Pre - reading:</b>


<b> Vocabulary:</b>
<b> - land : đất </b>


- to cut down (tree / the forest) : đốn
- to burn : đốt


- to destroy : phá hủy
- plants : cây cối


- be in danger: trong mối nguy hieåm
<b>What and where</b>


- Elicit the vocabulary from the students
and write them in the circles.


- Get students to repeat the words


including the rubbed out words by pointing
at the empty circle.


<b>Ordering pictures</b>


- Set the sence: You are going to read about
some problems which are happing now.
Can you put the problems above in order.


<b>a)</b> producing plants
<b>b)</b> cutting down trees
<b>c)</b> More food



<b>d)</b> Burning the forests
<b>e)</b> Growing the population
<b>f)</b> Making new fields
Animals and plants in danger.
<b>2.While reading</b>


- Get students to read the text and check.
<b>e) c) b) d)</b>


<b> f) a) g)</b>


<b>Comprehension questions: A5,p 168</b>
- Have them answer the questions in full
sentences then copy in their notebooks –


<b>Group works.</b>
- Lookl at the board.


- Listen to the teacher.
- Work in teams.


- Come to the board and match English
words with the Vietnamese translation.


- Listen to teacher .


- Repeat after the teacher.


- Notice the Vietnamese translation.
- Copy in their notebook.



- Students repeat chorally and remember all
the words.


- Go to the board and fill in the circles with
the right words.


- Listen to the teacher.
- Put the problems in order.


- Read the text and check.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

the passage and answers .


+ Why do we need more land?
<i>………</i>
<b> </b>


<b>4.Post reading: </b>


<b>Recall</b>


- Ask students to retell the content of the
above passage, ask them some questions as
models students to practice asking


questions with “Why<i>…… ”? and answer </i>
<i>with Because “</i> <i>…………”</i>


- What’s the population of the world now?


- Why do people need more food?


- Why do people cut down the forests?
- Why do farmers burning the forests?
- Why are the Asian animals in
danger?


<b>5.Homework:</b>


- Ask students to learn by heart
vocabulary


- learn “why …” and answer “ Because
…………”.


- Have them prepare Unit 16 - Lesson 3:


<i>(B1) : reading a text about polution..</i>


- Answer the questions in full


sentences, then copy the passage and
the answers.


<b>a) ..because there are more people</b>
<b> b) ..because they need more fields </b>
<b> c) .. because people /we are </b>


destroying their home and their...



- Listen to the teacher, then practice in
pairs asking Wh – question with
“Why <i>………”</i>and answer with
“Because …………”


- Take notes and memorize


- Do homework as the teacher requests




<i><b>Content</b></i> <i><b>Teacher’s activities</b></i> <i><b>Students’ activities</b></i>


-.


- Ask students to work in
teams.




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>

<b>g)</b>
<b>: </b>
<b> </b>
<b> </b>



environment.


-



<b> </b>


<b> </b> -


<b> </b>- Vocabulary.


- <i>“Why ………?” and</i>
<i>“Because………?.</i>


- Unit 16: <b>Man And The </b>
<b>Environment </b>– <i>POLLUTION</i> -
Lesson 4 : <i>(B1)</i>


-.


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>



<i>………</i>
<i>……….</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

<i> Week: 34 </i>

<b>UNIT 16: </b>

<b>MAN AND THE </b>


<b>ENVIRONMENT</b>



<i> Period: 100</i> <b>Lesson 4: POLLUTION ( B1 - 2 )</b>


<i> Date of preparation:……….. </i>


I. Aim: Reading a text about Pollution for vocabulary and to understand ideas .
II. Objective: At the end, students can understand ideas.



III. Teaching aids: Textbook and poster.
IV. Procedure:


<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Content</b></i> <i><b>Teacher’s activities</b></i> <i><b>Students’ activities</b></i>


5’ <b>1. Revision:</b>


<b> đốn hạ cây </b>


<i>mối nguy hiểm </i>


<i>đốt cháy</i>


<i>sản xuất</i>


<i>con vaät</i>


<i>phá hủy</i>


<b>Slap the board</b>


- Put English words on
the board.


- Call two students of two
teams to the front of the
class.


- Call out one of the
Vietnamese translation in


loud voice.


<b>Group works.</b>


- Say Enghlish words .
- Run forward and slap
the correct words on the
board.


- Continue until students
have slapped all the
words.


8’ <b>2 .Pre - reading:</b>
<b> Vocabulary:</b>


- the environment : môi trường
- The ocean = the sea: biển, đại
dương


- the air : khơng khí
- trash : rác rưởi


- pollute : làm ô mhiểm


<b>Elicit vocabulary</b>


 Translation
 Visual
 Translation


 Translation
 Explanation
 Example


- Listen to teacher .
- Repeat after the
teacher.


- Notice the Vietnamese
translation.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

- power: năng lượng


- waste: phí phạm, lãng phí


 Translation notebook.
<b>* Checking vocabulary:</b>


<b> </b>


<b>Rub out and remember</b>


-Point to the Vietnamese
translations and rub out
English words.


- Get students to call the
English words.


- Students repeat


chorally and remember
all the English words.
- Call the English words
and write the English
words if there is time.
4’ <b> B1 – page 169</b>


What are we destroying?
1. 2. 3.
What are we wasting?
1. 2.


What are we polluting?
1. 2. 3. 4.


<b>Pre Questions - Predict</b>


- Set the sence: You are
going to read a text about
What we are doing to our
environment. Guess the
answers for the questions.


- Listen to the
teacher.


- Guess the
answers.



15’ <b>2.While reading: </b>


<b> </b> What are we destroying ?
1. <i>forests</i> 2. <i>wild animal</i>


3.<i>plants</i>


What are we wasting?
1. <i>water</i> 2. <i>power</i>
What are we polluting?
1. <i>the air</i> 2. <i>the land</i> 3.<i>the </i>
<i>rivers</i>


4. <i>the oceans</i>


<b> Comprehension questions: </b>
<b>a) ..</b>because we’re detroying the
forest


<b>b) </b>Gases are polluting the air.


<b>c) </b>The pollution comes from
gases and trash.


<b>d) </b>Trash is polluting the land,
rivers ……


- Get students to read the
text and check.



- Have them answer the
questions in full
sentences then copy in
their notebooks – the
passage and answers .
+ Why are wild animals
and plants in danger?


- Read the text and
check.


- Read the passage
carefully


- Answer the questions
in full sentences, then
copy the passage and
the answers.


10’ <b>4.Post reading: </b>
<b> </b><i><b>Don’t Destroy our </b></i>
<i><b>Environment!</b></i>


<i> Don’t dsetroy the forests.</i>
<i> Don’t destroy the animals.</i>
<i> Don’t destroy the plants</i>
<i> Don’t waste water.</i>


<b>Write it up</b>



- Ask students to use the
Predict Pre Questions to
make a list of “Don’t’.
- Give the first two as an
example:


+<i>What are we</i>


- Use the Predict Pre
Questions to make a lst
of “Don’t”


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

<i> Don’t waste power.</i>
<i> Don’t pollute the air.</i>
<i> Don’t pollute the land.</i>
<i> Don’t pollute the rivers.</i>
<i> Don’t pollute the oceans.</i>


<i>destroying?</i>


<i> (forest): Don’t destroy</i>
<i>the foersts</i>


<i> +What are we wasting?</i>
<i> (water): Don’t waste</i>
<i>water.</i>


3’ <b>5.Homework:</b>


<b> </b>- Vocabulary.


- <i>The Pollution</i>


- Unit 16: <b>Man And The </b>
<b>Environment </b>– <i>POLLUTION</i> -
Lesson 5 : <i>(B2)</i>


- Ask students to learn by
heart vocabulary


- Have them prepare Unit
16 - Lesson 5: <i> (B2) :</i>
<i>Should / Shouldn’t.</i>


- Take notes and
memorize


- Do as the teacher
requests.


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>



<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i>………</i>
<i>……….</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

<i> Week: 34</i>

<b>UNIT 16: MAN AND THE </b>



<b>ENVIRONMENT </b>



<i> Period: 101</i> <b>Lesson 5: NATURAL FEATURES (C1 – </b>



<b>C2)</b>


<i> Date of preparation:………. </i>


I. Aim: Further practice in Should and Shouldn’t for giving about the
environment.


II. Objective: Help students know how to give adviceusing should / shouldn’t
III. Teaching aids: Poster and Cards.


IV. Procedure:


<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Content</b></i> <i><b>Teacher’s activities</b></i> <i><b>Students’ activities</b></i>


5’ <b>1. Revision</b>:


<b>C</b> <b>O</b> <b>L</b> <b>L</b> <b>E</b> <b>C</b> <b>T</b> <b>P</b>


<b>U</b> <b>P</b> <b>I</b> <b>C</b> <b>K</b> <b>P</b> <b>W</b> <b>O</b>


<b>T</b> <b>H</b> <b>R</b> <b>O</b> <b>W</b> <b>L</b> <b>E</b> <b>L</b>


<b>D</b> <b>E</b> <b>S</b> <b>T</b> <b>R</b> <b>O</b> <b>Y</b> <b>L</b>


<b>O</b> <b>V</b> <b>G</b> <b>R</b> <b>O</b> <b>W</b> <b>O</b> <b>U</b>


<b>W</b> <b>A</b> <b>S</b> <b>T</b> <b>E</b> <b>S</b> <b>U</b> <b>T</b>


<b>N</b> <b>S</b> <b>D</b> <b>A</b> <b>M</b> <b>A</b> <b>G</b> <b>E</b>



<i> cut down, plow, we, you, </i>
<i>pollute.</i>


<i> collect, pink, throw, destroy, </i>
<i>grow, </i>


<i> waste, damage.</i>
<i> save</i>


<b>Word Square</b>


- Write the word of the
square on the board.
- Tell the students what
the topic is and how
many hidden words are
there.


- Get the students to
come to the board and
circle any words they can
see.


- Look at the word of
the square on the board.
- Listen to the teacher
and answer the teacher
questions.


+ There are 19 hidden


workds


- Come to the board
and circle any words
they can see.


10’ <b>2 .Presentation: </b>
<b> * Vocabulary:</b>


-a trash can = a waste
basket:thùng rác
- to put: đặt, để


- a lot of = lots = many: nhiều
- great (adj): to lớn




<b>Elicit vocabulary</b>


 Translation
 Translation
 Synonym
 Explanation


- Listen to teacher .
- Repeat after the
teacher.


- Notice the Vietnamese


translation.


- Copy in their
notebook.


<b>* Checking vocabulary:</b>
<b> </b>


<b>Rub out and remember</b>


-Point to the Vietnamese
translations and rub out


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

English words.


- Get students to call the
English words.


- Call the English words
and write the English
words if there is time.


<b> 2 .Presentation: </b>
<b> B4 page 171</b>


<i><b>Lan : </b>We shouldn’t leave our </i>
<i>trash.</i>


<i><b>Ba: </b>What are these going to do?</i>



<i><b>Nga</b></i><b>:</b> <i> Put it in a trash can</i>


<i><b>Nam: </b></i> <i>There aren’t any trash</i>
<i>cans.</i>


<i><b>Lan: </b> Then we should put it in a</i>
<i>bag and take it home</i>


<i><b>Should/ Shouldn’t + </b></i>
<i><b>V</b>infinitive</i>


- Nên / không nên.
- Dùng để ai đó


<b>Rub out & remember</b>
<b>dialogue</b>


- Set the scene: Phuong
and Thu are talking
about food and drink.
- Put the dialogue on the
board .


- Rub out some of the
words .


- Get students to isolate
the model sentence.
- Point to the model
sentence and ask :



<i>+ What shouldn’t we</i>
<i>do?</i>


<i> + What should we do?</i>
<i> </i>


- Practice saying the
dialogue.


- Remember te rubbed
out words and keep
practicing it.


- Repeat the rubbed out
dialogue from memory.
- Isolate the model
sentence.


- Listen to the teacher
and answer the
questions


- Take notes.


15’ <b>3. Practice:</b>


<b> </b>- waste / save / water
- waste/ save / power
- burn / collect / paper



- leave / put it in the the trash
can /


trash


- damage / grow / trees
- cut down / grow / forests


<b>Word cue drill</b>


- Run through the cues.
- Hold up the first cues
and say the model
sentences.


<i><b>S1</b>: We Shouldn’t waste</i>
<i>water.</i>


<i><b>S2</b>: We should save</i>
<i>water..</i>


- Do the same for the
second cue.


- Correct their mistakes.


- Look at the cues.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Repeat it chorally and


then individually.


- Make the sentence for
themselves.


- Practice in pairs.


- Some pairs practice in
front.


12’ <i> 1 .Warm up: </i>


<i> put our trash in the </i>
<i>trash can</i>


<i>plant more trees and damage</i>
<i>trees</i>


<i> flowers</i>


<b> </b><i><b>What should we do to make our school </b></i>
<i><b> green and clean?</b></i>


<i>collect bottles and cans waste </i>


<b>Brainstorm</b>


- Ask students to think of
How to make our school
green.



- Get them to go to the
board and write down
their ideas.


- Give feedback.


- Ask students to use the


- Listen to the teacher.
- Students to think of
some coutry names.
- Go to the board and
write down their idea.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>

<i>water </i>


<i> and </i>
<i>power</i>


<i> - Our school should be a </i>


<i>beautiful environment . We should</i>
<i>………</i>


<i> </i>


Brainstorm for cues for



the writing. how to make theirschool green and clean.


3’ <b>5.Homework:</b>


<b> </b>- Vocabulary.
- <i>Should / shouldn’t</i>
<i> </i> - Writing.


- Unit 16: <b>Man And The </b>
<b>Environment </b>– <i>GRAAMAR </i>
<i> </i>
<i>PRACTICE</i>


- Ask students to learn by
heart vocabulary and
“Should / shouldn’t”
- Have them prepare
Unit 16 - Lesson 6:


<i>GRAMMAR PRACTICE. </i>


- Take notes and
memorize


- Do as the teacher
requests.


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>


<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i>………</i>
<i>……….</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>



<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

<i> Week: 34</i>

<b>UNIT 16: </b>

<b>MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT</b>



<i> Period: 102</i> <b>Lesson 6: GRAMMAR PRACTICE</b>


<i> Date of preparation:………. </i>


I. Aim: Further practice in Present simple and progressive, comparatives and
superlatives,


Quantifiers and countability: countries, natural features, Farming and
environment vocab.


II. Objective: At the end, students can get main points: Comparatives,
superlatives,


Quantifiers, and countability, present, progressive tense.
III. Teaching aids: Textbook


IV. Procedure:


<i><b>Content</b></i> <i><b>Teacher’s activities</b></i> <i><b>Students’ activities</b></i>
<b>1.Countries and language with</b>



<b>Present simple tense:</b>


<b> </b> <b> France</b>


<i>Japanese</i>


<i>China the world</i>
<i>French</i>


<i> </i>
<i> countries language</i>
<i> Japan </i>


<i>Vietnam</i>
<i>Chinese </i>


<i> Vietnamese </i>


<b>Page 174:</b>


<i>+ <b>S1:</b> I ‘m from Japan and I</i>
<i>speak </i>


<i> Japanese. </i>


<i> </i> + <i><b>S2:</b> Are you from China?</i>
<i> + <b>S1:</b> No, I’m not.</i>


<i> +<b>S3: </b>Do you speak Japanese?</i>



<b>Networks</b>


- Write a network on the
board and put some more
words below it.


- Get students to think of
activities they do in
seasons.


- Get students to put the
given words in the
appropriate circles


- Give feedback.


<b>Guessing game.</b>


- Ask students to use the
Brainstorm to play game.
- Ask them to choose any
ones, write a full
sentence and cover


- Get the rest of the class
to guess where he/ she
from and which languege
he / she speaks. The first
student guesses the
house correctly comes up



- Students to think of
the town and country.
- Go to the board and
fill in the remaining
empty circles with their
own words.


- Students use the
Brainstorm to play
game.


+ <i>I’m from Japan.</i>
<i> + I speak Japanese.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

<i> + <b>S1:</b> Yes, I do.</i>


<i> +<b>S4: </b>Are you from Canada?</i>
<i> + <b>S1:</b> No, I’m not.</i>


to the front, chooses a
new house and the game
continues.


10’ <b>2. Adjectives: Comparatives </b>
<b>and </b>


<b> superlatives - P</b>
<b>175</b>



<b> a/ </b>longer – the longest
<b>b/</b> the longest


<b>c/ </b>the tallest – taller – the
tallest


<b>d/ </b>biggest – bidder – the
biggest –


the biggest


<b>Table completion</b>


- Ask students to tell
again the form of


comparatives and


superatives.


- Call students to
complete the table ( G3,P
175) and complete the
passages.


- Call students to check
the answers.


- Tell again te form of
comparatives .



<i>+ Adj + ER</i>


<i> + The + Adj +</i>
<i>EST</i>




- Give the answers.


5’ <b>3.Present simple and present</b>
<b>progressive</b>: GM2 - page 174


<i><b> Thu</b></i>


<i><b> </b></i>

<i><b> Chi </b><b> </b></i>
- What/


name?


-Where /
live?




-Whe/stayno
w?


-What/ do?
- What /


teach?


- teach /
you?


Susan
London
Ha Noi.
teacher
English
No / Mr Hai


<b>Mapped dialogue</b>


- Put the dialogue on the
board which is only
words. The words are
cues.


- Model the dialogue.
- Run through the cues
like a drill with the whole
class.


- Look at the board and
listen to the teacher.
- Repeat after the
teacher.


- Practice the dialogue


in pair .


- Some pairs practice in
front.


- Rewrite the dialogue .


5’ <b>4. A few, a little, a lot / lots of: </b>
<b> GM4 - page 175</b>


<b> </b> a lot a little a few
a lot lots a lot


<b>Gap fill</b>


- Call students to remind
how to use a few, a little,
a lot of…


- As k students to find in
the blank with a few, a
little ……


- Reimind how to use a
few, a little …………


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

10’ <b>5. Intergrated iterms of </b>
<b>grammar and vovabulary</b>



<b> 1 2 3 4 </b>
<b>5 </b>


<b> 6 7 8 9 </b>
<b>10 </b>


<b>2 Name 2 things we should do to </b>
<i>save our environment</i>


<b>3 Name 4 vegetables we grow in </b>
<i>VN.</i>


<b>4 Name 3 farm animals.</b>


<b>6 Name 4 natural features there </b>
<i>are in VN. </i>


<b>7 What’s the second biggest city </b>
<i>in VN?</i>


<b>8 Name 2 langueges that you </b>
<i>speak.</i>


<b>10 Name 2 countries you would </b>
<i>like to visit.</i>


<b>1 - 5 - 9 : </b><i><b>Lucky numbers</b></i>


<b>Lucky numbers</b>



- Write the numbers on
the board.


- Divide class into teams.
The teams take turn to
choose the numbers.
- Tell students that they
have to answer the
questions .


- Look at the board.
- Work in teams.


- Take turn to choose
the numbers.


- Listen to the teacher
carefully.


- Answer the questions.


5’ <b>3.Homework:</b>


<b> </b>- Vocabulary and Grammar
points (Unit9 – Unit16).


<b> </b>- Exercises in the exercise book
from Unit 9 to Unit 15.


<b> </b>- <i> THE 2ND<sub> TERM </sub></i>



<i> </i>
<i>EXAMINATION</i>.


- Ask students to review


vocabulary and


Grammar points (Unit 9 –
Unit15) and exercises in
the exercise book from
Unit 9 to Unit 15 .


- Have them prepare


<i>THE 2ND<sub> TERM </sub></i>


<i>EXAMINATION </i>


- Review vocabulary
and Grammar points
(Unit12 – Unit14) and
exercises in the
exercise book from
Unit 12 to Unit 14 .
- Prepare <i> THE 2ND</i>


<i>TERM EXAMINATION</i>
<i> </i>



<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> Week: 35</i> <i> </i>

<b>REVISION</b>




<i> Period: 103</i>


<i> Date of preparation:………. </i>


I. Aim: Review some basic knowledge from Unit 9 – 15 ( Suhch as Simple
present, present progressive tense, comparatives, superatives, Let’s ……….).
II. Objective: At the end, students can get main points and do the text well.
III. Teaching aids: Textbook


IV. Procedure:


<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Content</b></i> <i><b>Teacher’s activities</b></i> <i><b>Students’ activities</b></i>


5’ <b>1. Be going to: (sẽ) Diễn at3 một</b>
<i>dự định trong tương lai.</i>
<i>( tomorrow, next)</i>


<i> <b>S + am / is / are + going to +</b></i>
<i><b>Vinf</b></i>


<i><b> Ex:</b></i> <i>I’m going to visit Hue this</i>
<i>summer</i>


- Let students tell “ be
going to” : meaning, use
and form.


- Give an example.


- Tell tell “ be going


to” : meaning, use and
form.


- Look at the board.


5’ <i><b>2. Present simple tense:</b></i> Thì
Hiện tại đơn diễn tả một
thói quen, một hoạt thường
xuyên xãy ra ở hiện tại.
( often, usually, sometimes…


<i><b>S + V (s / es )</b></i>


<i> - <b>Vinf : </b>I / We / They / Plural </i>
<i>nouns </i>


<i> - <b>Vs / es : </b>He/ shee / it / singular </i>
<i>nouns </i>


<i><b>* Ex</b>: We go to school by car</i>
<i> She works carefully.</i>


- Have students remind
the form of present
progressive tense.


- Give 2 examples to
illustrate.


- Remind the form ( Say


clearly which sbjects go
with I / we / you and
they or he / she / it
……… .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>

5’ <i><b>3. Present progressive tense:</b></i> Thì
Hiện tại tiếp diễn tả một
hành động đang diễn xãy ra
ở hiện tại. ( now, at the


moment…


<i><b>S + am / is / are + Ving</b></i>


<i> </i>


<i><b>* Ex</b>: I am playing soccer.</i>


- Call students remind the
form of present
progressive tense.


- Write it on the board.
- Give an example.


- Remind the form and
use.


- Take notes.



3’ <b>4. How often……… ?: Thường </b>
<i>thế nào ? </i>


<i> <b>Adverbs of frequency: </b>always, </i>
<i>usually, often, sometimes, </i>


<i>never… .</i>


<i><b>* Ex</b>: How often does she go to </i>
<i>the zoo?</i>


<i> She usually goes to the zoo.</i>
<i> She goes to the zoo twice a </i>
<i>month.</i>


- Ask them to retell some
adverbs of frequency.
- Give examples.


- Tell some adverbsof
frequency.


- Take notes.


2’ <b>5. How much: (bao nhiêu) Hỏi </b>
<i>giá</i>


<i><b>How much is it / are they?</b></i>
<i><b> It is ……… / They are ……….</b></i>
<i><b>* Ex</b>: How much is an ice-cream?</i>


<i> It’s 1.000 dong</i>


<i> How much are they?</i>
<i> They are 5.000 dong </i>


- Remind how to ask and
answer about price


- Give examples.


- Listen to the teacher.


- Take notes.


5’ <b>6. Comparatives and </b>
<b>superlatives:</b>


<i> * Comparatives:</i>


<i><b> Adjective + ER + than………..</b></i>
<i><b>* Ex</b>: Nam is taller than I</i>


<i> Minh is bigger than his </i>
<i>father.</i>


<i>*Superlatives::</i>


- Call students to give te
form of comparatives and
superlatives.



- Gives examples.


- Students give te form
of comparatives and
superlatives.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

<i><b> The + Adjective + EST</b></i>
<i><b>* Ex</b>: -Mexico is the biggest city </i>
<i>in the </i>


<i> world.</i>


<i> -That is the smallest house.</i>


2’ <b>7. Suggestion: ( Chuùng ta haõy..)</b>


<i><b> Let’s + Vo ………..</b></i>


<i><b>* Ex</b>: Let’s go to Huong pogoda.</i>


- Call students to remind
the suggestion with Let’s


- Remind how to
suggest.


3’ <b>8. The weather and seasons:</b>
<i> * The weather</i>



<i><b>What’s the weather like in…..?</b></i>
<i><b>It’s ……….. . </b></i>


<i><b> * </b></i><b>Seasons: </b>-<b> Spring – warm</b>
<i> </i> - <i>Summer - hot </i>


-<b> Fall – cool</b>


<i> </i> - <i>Winter - cold </i>
<i> </i>


<i><b>*Ex</b>:What’s the weather like in </i>
<i>the fall?</i>


<i> It’s cool in the fall.</i>


- Ask students about the
weather in the seasons.


- Answer the questions
about the weather .


5’ <b>9. How much / many…………? Bao </b>
<i>nhieâu</i>


<i><b>How many + coutable </b></i>
<i><b>Noun…?</b></i>


<i><b>How muc +uncoutable Noun.?</b></i>



<i> <b>*Ex</b>: - How many eggs are </i>
<i>there?</i>


<i> There is one egg.</i>


<i> -How much meat do you </i>
<i>need?</i>


<i> - A kilo.</i>


- Remind countable
and uncoutable
nouns.


- Call students to say
again how to use
How much /
many…?


- Remind countable and
uncoutable nouns.


- Give the way to use “
How much / many ..?”


5’ <b>10. To be: am / is / are</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

<i> He/ she / it is</i>


<i> We / you / they are</i> “to be “ and how toconjugate.



5’ <b>Homework:</b>


- Main points ( Unit 9 – Unit 15)
- Vocabulary ( Unit 9 – Unit 15)
- <i>THE SECOND TERM </i>


<i> </i>
<i>EXAMINATION</i>


- Ask them to leanrt by
heart main points and
vocabulary from Unit 9 to
Unit 15.


- Have them prepair <i> The </i>
<i>Second Term </i>


<i>Examination.</i>


- Listen carefully.
- Take notes.


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>



<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i>………</i>
<i>……….</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>



<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

<i> Week: 35</i> <i> </i>

<b>EXERCISE</b>



<i> Period: 104</i>


<i> Date of preparation:………. </i>


I. Aim: Students do some exercises to practice listening, reading and writing.
II. Objective: Help stuents do the exercises well.


III. Teaching aids: Posters.
IV. Procedure:


<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Content</b></i> <i><b>Teacher’s activities</b></i> <i><b>Students’ activities</b></i>


5’ <b>I. </b><i><b>LISTNING:</b></i> <i><b>Listen to the</b></i>
<i><b>teacher, then write True / False</b></i>



<b>F</b>1. Mai doesn’t like sports.


<b>T</b>2. She often play sports in her
free time.


<b>F</b>3. She often plays with her
sister.


<b>T</b> 4. Sometimes they listen to
music or play video games.


<i><b>* Listen:</b> Mai likes sports. She</i>
<i>often plays sports in her free time.</i>
<i>She likes badminton very much.</i>
<i>She often plays with Huong, her</i>


- Hand out the posters.
- Read the passage twice.
- Ask students to write
True or False.


- Call students to write
the answers.


- Check and make sure.


- Get the test.


- Llisetn to the teacher
twice, write T/ F.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>

<i>friend. Somestime they listen to</i>
<i>music or play video games.</i>


10’ <b>II. GRAMMAR & </b>
<b>VOCABULARY: </b>
<i> <b>Choose the best option</b></i>


1. Which sports ______ you
like?


a. do b. does c. are
2. Mary always _______
carefully.


a. work b. tenth c. works
3. We don’t go camping because
we don’t have a _____ .


a. ten b. tenth c. tent
4. Tuan is going to stay there
_____ 3 days.


a. visit b. visits c. to
visit


5. Tuan is going to stay _____
Nha Trang this summer.


6. Lee is from China. He speaks


_____


a.Vietnamese b.Enghlish c.
Chinese


7. How often does she read? __ a
week


a. Vietnamese b. English c.
Chinese


8. What’s the weather like in the
fall?


It’s ________ .


9. Mai _____ her homework
now.


a. is doing b. are doing c.
does


10. ______ the children often fly
kites?


a. Do b. Does c. Are


- Ask students to do Gap
fill.



- Call students to choose
the best answers to fill in
the blank.


- Check and correct.


- Read ten sentences
and then complete.


- Choose the best
answers.


Correct in their paper.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

Minh and his friends are going
to visit Hue this summer


vacation.They are going there by
trains. They are going to stay in a
hotel. They are going to stay
there for a week. They are going
to visit Hue for 1st<sub> three days. </sub>


Then they are going to visit Ha
Noi.


<i><b>A – Write True or False:</b></i>


<b>T</b> 1. Minh and his his friends are
going to visit Hue for first three


days.


<b>F</b> 2. They are going to visit Nha
Trang after that.


<b>F</b> 3. They travel by car.


<b>T</b> 4. They stay in a hotel.
<i><b> B – Answer the questions:</b></i>


1. Do Minh and his friends go by
train?


2. How long are they going to
stay?


- Ask students to read the
passage and do the
exercise.


- Call students to give
True or False.


- Check and make sure.
- Call two students to
answer the questions.
- Check and correct.


- Read the passage and
do the exercise.



- Give the answers.


- Correct.


- Two students answer
the questions (write the
answers on the board)


10’ <b>IV. WRITING: </b><i><b>Rewrite the</b></i>
<i><b>passage below by replacing italic</b></i>
<i><b>words with the words given.</b></i>


Manh is going to visit <i>(1)</i>
<i>DaLat</i> this summer vacation. He
is going to go with his <i>(2)</i> <i>sister</i>.
They are going by <i>(3)</i> car. They
are going to stay <i>(4)</i> <i>with their</i>
<i>uncle</i>. They are going to stay for


<i>(5) four</i> days.


<i><b>* </b>Vung Tau, friends, bus, in a</i>
<i>hotel, two.</i>


- Explain the request of
writing.


- Guide how to write.
- Call one student to the


board and write down.
- Check and correct.


- Listen carefully.


- Write the paragraph
by replacing the italic
words.


- One student goes to
the board and writes
down.


- Correct.


5’ <b>* Homework:</b>


<b> </b>- See again all units ( 9 – 15 )
esp, this exercise for the second
exam.


- Say carefully. - Listen.
- Take notes.


<i> </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>

<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>



<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i>………</i>
<i>……….</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> </i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………..</i>


<i> Week: 35</i>



<i> Period: 105</i>

<i><b>THE SECOND TERM </b></i>



<i><b>EXAMINATION</b></i>



<i> Date of preparation:……….</i>


<b> I. LISTENING :(2 ms )</b>


<i><b>Listen to the passage and then matcch the name with the right things :</b></i>


1.Vui a. a camera
2.Ly b. some drinks
3.Lan c. some food
4.Mai d. a


1. ……….. 2. ……….. 3. ……… 4. …………5. ………..


<b> II. GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY : (2.5 ms) </b>


<i><b>Choose the best options to complete each sentence : </b></i>


1. ……… she like sports ?


a.Do b.Does c.Is


2.How ………… do you watch TV? -Once a week.


a.often b.usually c.never



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>

4.We ………video games now .


a.is playing b.am playing c.are playing
5.They don't go camping because they don't have a ………


a.ten b. tent c. tenth


6.Phuong and Mai are going to stay ……… a week.


a.at b.on c.for


7. ………… eggs does Lan want ? -A dozen.


a. How many b. How much c.How often


8. My father often ……… to work by car.


a. go b. goes c.gos


9. Nam doesn't need ……… eggs, but he needs some meat.


a. any b. some c. an


10. At the canteen, a ……… of noodles is 2,000 ñ.


a. glass b.box c.bowl


<b> III. READING : (3 ms)</b>


This weekend ,Thu and her friends are going to have a picnic in Sapa. The


weather is fine and cold.Thu is


going to bring a camera to take some photos. Lan is going to bring some food. Nam
is going to bring some


drinks. Minh is going to bring a blanket .They are going to go by minibus. They are
going to start at 6 a.m and


go back home by 6 p.m.


<i><b>A. True (T) or False (F ) ? (1.5m)</b></i>


<b> </b>……… 1.Thu and her friends are going to go camping in Sapa.
……… 2.The weather is fine and cold.


……… 3.They are going to go by car.


<i><b>B. Answer the questions :</b></i>


1.Are they going to start at 6 a.m and go back home at 6 p. m?


………
……….


2. Who is going to bring a camera?


………
………


<b> IV. WRITING : ( 2.5 ms)</b>



<i><b>Read the passage below and then write about yourself , changing"Minh" to "I":</b></i>


Minh likes walking. On the weekend, he often goes walking in the
mountains. He usually goes with


two friends. Minh and his friends always wear strong boots and warm clothes. They
always take food , water


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>

<i>Begin with :</i>


<i>I like walking . On the weekend, I</i>


<i>………</i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………</i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………</i>


<i>………</i>
<i>………</i>


<i> </i>


<i> </i>


</div>

<!--links-->

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về

Tải bản đầy đủ ngay
×